Operating manual
Operating
®
ep
on
see
Motion
p.
Tab.
Fig.
—5070
p. CBmanual
with integrated PC and epBlue
Operating manual
epMotion® 5070 CB with integrated PC and epBlue
5070 900.442
Operating manual
epBlue Version 10
Copyright© 2010 Eppendorf AG, Hamburg. No part of this publication may be reproduced without the prior permission of
the copyright owner.
Registered trademarks
epMotion®, epT.I.P.S.®, eppendorf® and Mastercycler® are registered trademarks of Eppendorf AG, Hamburg, Germany.
Falcon® is a registered trademark of Becton Dickinson, Franklin Lakes, USA.
LightCycler® and MAGNA PURE® are registered trademarks of Roche Diagnostics.
SIMATIC® is a registered trademark of Siemens AG
5070 900.442-03/0411
epBlue Version 10
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
1
Table of contents
1
User instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2
7
7
7
8
8
Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3
Using this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Danger symbols and danger levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1
Table of contents
Main illustration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delivery package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2
Cleanbench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of hardware and labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1
Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2
Labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3
Important volume terms for tubes and wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
13
13
13
14
14
16
18
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information on product liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings for intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
23
23
26
4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1
Check correct installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Creating the first user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing or replacing the dispensing tool (tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Installing the dispensing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2
Removing the dispensing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3
Notes on the dispensing sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing labware on the worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
Position labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and exiting epBlue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1
Start epBlue and log in with your user account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2
Logging out or exiting epBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Home tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1
Overview of the Home tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2
Open recent application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The file window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1
Access to the file window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2
Opening an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3
Creating a new folder in your user directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4
Creating a new application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5
Copying applications and folders from other user directories to one's own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.6
Editing folder and application properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.7
Deleting applications and folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.8
Import applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.9
Exporting applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29
29
31
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
34
35
35
36
37
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
44
45
3
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
1
Table of contents
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
6
Quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.1
6.2
7
7.3
114
114
115
115
115
115
124
Error search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
Read error of the optical sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Dispensing error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
126
126
127
127
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.1
4
Short instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1
Select and start the epMotion method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example method for epMotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1
Method objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2
Sample preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3
Creating the example method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.4
Starting the method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.1
7.2
8
5.6.10 Open labware for editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.6.11 Deleting a labware combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
The Work tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.7.1
Overview of the Work tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.7.2
Worktable tab - equip the worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.7.3
Procedure tab - defining a procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.7.4
Reference list of commands and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.7.5
The Run tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.7.6
The Control tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
The Labware tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.8.1
Overview of the Labware tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.8.2
Activate or deactivate labware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.8.3
Adjusting the labware bottom tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.8.4
Filling racks and module racks with tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.8.5
Fill reservoir rack with reservoirs and filled module racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.8.6
Download additional labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
The Functions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.9.1
Overview of the Functions tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.9.2
Optical sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.9.3
Tool interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.9.4
Firmware Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.9.5
Dosing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
The Admin tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.10.1 Logging in as administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.10.2 Overview of the Admin tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.10.3 Account Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.10.4 Edit accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.10.5 Set up a new password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.10.6 Group overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.10.7 Creating and editing user groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.10.8 Starting data backup and restoring data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.10.9 Printing the error log and debug log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.1.1
Replacing the sealing rings of the eight-channel dispensing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.1.2
Maintaining the dispensing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
8.2
9
1
154
154
154
154
154
154
155
Table of contents
8.3
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1
Cleaning the worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2
Cleaning the worktable base adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3
Cleaning the dispensing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4
Cleaning the thermoadapter, thermoblock and thermorack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5
Autoclaving Labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decontamination before shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight/dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.2
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dispensing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.1
Noise level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.2
Optical sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.3
Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.4
Rack LC for LightCycler capillaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
158
158
158
159
159
10 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
10.1
Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Automated pipetting system epMotion 5070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Dispensing Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 epT.I.P.S. Motion pipette tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.4 Reagent reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.5 Racks for individual tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.6 Modular rack components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.7 Height Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.8 Additional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.9 Accessories for real-time PCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
160
160
160
161
162
162
162
163
163
11 Transport, storage and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
11.1
11.2
11.3
Shut down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Installation after transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
12 Appendix A: Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12.1
12.2
12.3
Labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 Overview of labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3 Abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.4 Labware definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.5 Compile your own labware combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools (dispensing tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2 Detection version 1: detecting liquid surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.3 Detection variant 2: Tip detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.4 Detection variant 3: Location detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.5 Detection limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
167
168
181
182
183
184
185
185
186
189
189
189
5
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
1
13 Appendix B: Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Table of contents
13.1
13.2
13.3
Commands, parameters, options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.1 Number of Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.2 Sample Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.3 Reagent Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.4 Dilute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.5 Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.6 Pool One destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.7 Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.8 Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.9 Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.10 Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.11 User intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.12 TempCycler (only epMotion 5075 MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.13 StartCycler (only epMotion 5075 MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing commands from a CSV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1 Creating a CSV file for import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.2 Importing a CSV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Predefined methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.1 Nucleic acid prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.2 PCR setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.4 Sequencing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
190
190
192
204
204
207
209
210
212
213
213
214
214
215
216
216
217
220
220
220
220
222
14 Appendix C: BIOS password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.1
Changing the BIOS password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
1
User instructions
1
1.1
User instructions
Using this manual
1
Material damage due to incorrect use.
NOTICE!
1.2
User instructions
Only use the product for its intended purpose as described in the operating manual.
Ensure adequate material resistance when using chemical substances.
In case of doubt, contact the product manufacturer.
Before using the epMotion 5070 CB for the first time, please read the operating manual.
Please view this manual as part of the product and keep it somewhere easily accessible.
When passing on the device, always enclose the operating manual.
If this manual is lost, please request another one. The current version of the operating manual
can be found on our website at www.eppendorf.com.
Danger symbols and danger levels
Representation
Meaning
DANGER
Risk of electric shock with potential for severe injury or death as a consequence.
DANGER
Risk of explosion with potential for severe injury or death as a consequence.
DANGER
Bio hazard with potential for risk to health or death as a consequence.
WARNING
Warning of potential injury.
CAUTION
Notification of lower risk or danger of material damage.
Note
Refers to particularly useful information and tips.
1.3
Symbols used
Depiction
Meaning
You are requested to perform an action.
1.
Perform these actions in the sequence described.
2.
•
Text
List.
Terms and key names from the software.
References useful information.
7
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
1.4
Abbreviations used
DWP
Deepwell plate
epT.I.P.S.
eppendorf Totally Integrated Pipetting System
MMC™
1
User instructions
1.5
MultiMediaCard™
MTP
Micro test plate
PCR
Polymerase Chain Reaction
Glossary
A
Administrator
Application
Cleanbench
Users with special rights. Configuration settings and several system settings are primarily
reserved for the administrator. The administrator has a special PIN for logging in.
For the epMotion 5075, application is the broad term for epMotion methods and cycler programs.
C
Safety bench top class 2. A laminar air flow prevents external airborne germs from entering the
bench top, and aerosols contaminated with microorganisms from escaping from the bench top.
The cleanbench is for personal and product protection.
Command
Describes a procedure in a method including all parameters required for the optimal execution of
this process.
Comment
With the Comment command you can enter a comment line.
Dilute
D
The Dilute command is a modified Sample Transfer command making it easier to carry out
diluting series. A defined volume is transported from one well to the next several times by means
of pipetting.
E
Exchange
Using the Exchange command you can swap two Labware objects manually on the worktable.
Filling volume
Maximum filling volume of a tube or well that can be aspirated or whose tube, rack or plate can
be transported (transport only epMotion 5075).
F
H
Height adapter
The height adapter is for mounting very short labware that is placed next to taller labware (e.g.
reservoir rack) on the worktable. Travel distances and, therefore, operating times are reduced
with the height adapter.
L
Labware
General term for racks, plates, tips, etc., that can be positioned on the worktable. The
administrator specifies which labware can be used by selecting labware that is available in the
software. The most current labware version can be viewed on the homepage
www.epMotion.com.
Location
Position of a plate, tips or a rack on the worktable. 4 locations are available on the epMotion
worktable. 3 park positions are also shown on the worktable.
M
Method
Mix
Saved sequence for loading the surface (worktable) for the method start and the required
procedures for the epMotion.
With the Mix command you can mix liquids in a tube.
Module racks
The temperature-controlled module racks can be loaded with tubes in various models. Using an
adjusting pin, the tubes can be positioned at five different heights in the module racks. Up to
seven module racks can be positioned in a reservoir rack.
Number of samples
Use the Number of Samples command to specify how many samples are to be processed in the
subsequent steps of a procedure.
N
8
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
P
Pattern
Distribution pattern; specification of the aspiration and dispensing positions within a dispensing
command. With automatic pattern detection, patterns can be defined as simple standard patterns
or free patterns. Patterns are direction-independent in x-direction and y-direction (e.g. from left to
right or from right to left).
PCR clean
PCR clean is an Eppendorf AG purity standard for disposables. Products labeled with PCRclean
are certified free of human DNA, DNase, RNase and PCR inhibitors. A batch-specific certificate
can be downloaded from our homepage www.eppendorf.com.
Pool
Procedure
Program
With the Pool command you can transfer liquids from several source tube locations into
destination tube locations.
User instructions
Pool One
destination
1
With the Pool One Destination command you can transfer liquids from several source tube
locations into a single destination tube location.
List of commands in chronological order of execution.
For the epMotion 5075 MC, program refers to linked temperature cycles of a PCR on the
Mastercycler ep.
R
Rack
Reagent Transfer
Reservoir
Mount for tubes or pipette tips.
Use the Reagent Transfer command to transfer liquid from a source tube into one or several
locations of a destination tube.
The 30 mL and 100 mL reservoirs (pans, tubs) for the reagent presentation are suspended in a
reservoir rack (max. 7 reservoirs per rack). Reservoirs with a capacity of 300 mL or 400 mL are
placed at the location without a reservoir rack.
S
Sample Transfer
Use the Sample Transfer command to transfer several liquids from various locations of a source
tube into several locations of a destination tube.
Source and
destination
Source and destination tube. A location occupied with labware becomes either a source tube or a
destination tube in the commands Sample Transfer or Reagent Transfer.
StartCycler
With the StartCycler command you can select a cycler program and specify the start.
StartCycler must always be the last command of a method (epMotion 5075 MC).
T
TempCycler
Thermoadapter
Thermoblock
Thermorack
Using the TempCycler command you can select the temperature for the heated lid and/or the
thermoblock before starting the cycle (only in epMotion 5075 MC with integrated Mastercycler
ep).
The thermoadapter is for the mounting of a plate (depending on thermoadapter PCR or DWP).
Thermoadapters can be passively temperature controlled. Thermoadapters and plates are not a
fixed combination.
Metal body for combining with PCR plates and PCR tubes. Thermoblocks can be passively
temperature controlled. In the software, thermoblocks are pre-configured units of a PCR plate
and thermoblock. Thermoblocks are always placed on the worktable with a PCR plate.
Rack with metal body. For smaller tubes (e.g. Eppendorf Safe-Lock tubes for 0.5 ,1.5 mL or
2 mL), a temperature-controlled thermorack with lid holder and 24 positions can be used.
Tips
epT.I.P.S. Motion; pipette tips. Only epT.I.P.S. Motion can be used on the epMotion. Tips with or
without filter are used. epT.I.P.S. Motion with filter are PCR clean. Pipette tips are delivered
ready-for-use in PP racks.
Tool
Dispensing tool. 6 different dispensing tools can be used as alternatives.
Tubes
User intervention
Individual tubes that can be placed in a rack.
U
With the User Intervention command you can insert steps into your method that the user must
execute manually.
9
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
W
Wait
Working volume
1
User instructions
Worktable
10
The Wait command is used to select a pause before the next command.
Recommended working volume. Up to the working volume, liquids can be dispensed in a tube or
well with various liquid types with minimal contamination.
Graphic display of loading (tips, racks, plates ...) the surface by starting a method. If labware is
stacked at a location (e.g., height adapter and micro test plate), the stack is correspondingly
indicated in the worktable display.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
2
2
2.1
Product description
Product description
Main illustration
Abb. 1:
Front view of the epMotion 5070 CB
1
2
Product description
Fig. 1:
5
4
3
Front view of the epMotion 5070 CB
2
1
Carrier
2
Worktable
3
Waste container
4
Mouse
5
Monitor
11
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Abb. 2:
Detail of the rear view of the epMotion 5070 CB
1
2
2
3
Product description
4
Fig. 2:
1
Detail of the rear view of the epMotion 5070 CB
PC
2
Interfaces
(see p. 165)
3
Mains switch
4
Mains connection
Only connect devices to the interfaces that meet the IEC 950/EN 60950 (UL 1950) standards.
2.2
Delivery package
Quantity Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
1
5070 000.719
960000200
Automated pipetting system epMotion CB with integrated PC
as 5070 000.700 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
1
5075 753.006
960002016
Waste container
1
–
–
Optical sensor
1
–
–
Power cable
Compatible to the country where the order was placed or determined
1
–
–
epMotion 5070 Operating Manual
1
–
–
Tool for transport safety device
Hint!
12
A detailed overview of the accessories and the article numbers can be found
separately(see Accessory on p. 160).
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
2.3
Features
With epMotion 5070 CB you execute dispensing processes within a Cleanbench automatically.
There is a control panel for controlling the epMotion 5070 CB.
With epMotion 5070 CB you execute dispensing processes automatically. The PC with epBlue
software is used to control the epMotion 5070 CB.
epMotion 5070 CB can be supplied with a variety of dispensing tools which are inserted
manually. These dispensing tools and the appropriate pipette tips in each case (epT.I.P.S.
Motion) can be used to dispense quantities of liquid in the volume range from 1 µL to 1000 µL.
Also refer to the operating manual of the industrial PC and the keyboard.
2
Hint!
2.3.1
Principle of operation
Product description
The liquid is samples from the source tube in pipette tips, transported and deposited in the
destination tube.
On request, an optical sensor automatically checks the correct selection and positioning of tubes,
available supplies and the position of pipette tips in the rack, as well as liquid level in some tubes.
With the aid of predefined commands, you can create and edit simple or complex dispensing
operations yourself and combine these into methods. In the process, you specify in the software,
among other things, the source location and destination location as well as the desired
dispensing or transport pattern.
epMotion 5075 MC is equipped with a Mastercycler ep. Among other things, this system allows
fully-automatic sample preparation and subsequent amplification in the Mastercycler ep.
For further information, go to www.epMotion.com
2.3.2
Cleanbench
The cleanbenches used for the installation of the epMotion 5070 CB should ideally have a depth
of min. 60 cm and a lateral cable conduit. If there is no cable conduit, an adapted solution is
possible on-site. The perforated plates for ensuring the laminar ventilation flow should be
positioned in such a way so that the installation of the epMotion 5070 CB does not impair the
flow.
13
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
2.4
Overview of hardware and labware
Familiarize yourself with the epMotion 5070 CB and the labware prior to first use.
2.4.1
Hardware
1 2
3
4
Product description
2
9
8
7
6
5
1
Directions of movement of the carrier
2
Dispensing tool
3
Carrier
4
Optical sensor
5
Locations
6
Waste container (standard)
Locations A1, A2, B1 and B2 for labware.
7
Mains switch
The waste container can be autoclaved;
can be washed in a dishwasher.
8
Mouse
For switching on and off.
9
PC monitor and keyboard.
2.4.1.1 Worktable base adapter for the epMotion worktable
The worktable base adapter for the epMotion worktable consists of a set of 4
screw-on feet for adjusting the height of the epMotion. The screw-on feet may
only be installed by service personnel authorized by Eppendorf.
14
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
2.4.1.2 Dispensing tools (tools)
A total of six different dispensing tools is available for selection. For the three volume ranges 1 to
50 µL, 20 to 300 µL and 40 to 1000 µL a single-channel dispensing tool (TS xx) and an
eight-channel dispensing tool (TM xx-8) are available in each case.
Abb. 3:
Single-channel dispensing tool
Abb. 4:
Eight-channel dispensing tool
2
50
Single-channel dispensing tool
Dispensing tool
TS 50
TM 50-8
TS 300
TM 300-8
TS 1000
TM 1000-8
Fig. 4:
Eight-channel dispensing tool
Product description
Fig. 3:
Volume range
1 µL – 50 µL
20 µL – 300 µL
40 µL – 1000 µL
2.4.1.5 Optical sensor
The optical sensor is located in a tube to the right of the carrier.
With the aid of an optical procedure the optical sensor measures the light reflection of surfaces,
e.g., of labware on the worktable or of liquids placed in the tubes.
The optical sensor performs the following checking tasks on the epMotion 5070 CB:
• detecting codes on tip racks and tube racks
• determining existing stocks of tips in positioned tip racks so that tip racks which have been
started can also continue to be used
•
•
•
•
•
checking whether the correct rack has been inserted (height detection)
detecting height of plates
detecting whether a location programmed as occupied on the worktable really is occupied
detecting 30 mL or 100 mL reservoirs (tubs) and Module Racks in the Reservoir Rack
automatically checking the adjustment of the entire device by means of exact measuring
points on the surface of the worktable
• detecting the filling level of the liquids (liquid detection) in reservoirs, tubes and plates
Liquid Detection and Location detection can be performed for a labware height up to 107 mm.
CAUTION!
Faulty liquid detection due to air bubbles.
Liquid detection cannot be performed reliably if there are air bubbles in tubes or wells.
Before the start of a method, ensure that there are no air bubbles in tubes or wells.
Remove bubbles by tapping the tubes or plates sharply several times.
To save time and depending on the requirements of the current method, you can use the software
to activate or deactivate the individual functions of the optical sensor.
15
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
2.4.1.6 Waste system
The standard waste container can hold approx. 400 individually-ejected 1000 µL tips or
correspondingly more of smaller tip sizes.
2.4.2
Labware
The following list gives you an overview of the labware of the epMotion 5070 CB. More
information on available labware components can be found in the appendix (see Labware on
p. 167) as well as in the Internet at www.epMotion.com.
Labware
Description
Labware folder/
more information
2
Tubes
You can use different tubes on the epMotion 5070 CB by
loading module racks, racks and thermoracks:
Product description
•
•
•
•
Racks
Equip Racks + Modules
with Tubes
Safe-Lock tubes
Standard tubes 3810X
PCR tubes
Falcon tubes and other tubes from various
manufacturers
Racks are tube holders for up to 24 tubes with various
diameters.
Equip Racks + Modules
with Tubes
(see Racks for reagent
tubes on p. 170)
Height adapter
To keep carrier travel times and distances as short as
Adapters
possible, there are various height adapters (with a height of (see Height Adapter on
40, 55 and 85 mm) which you can use to compensate for
p. 178)
different heights of plates.
Plates
You can use different plates on the epMotion 5070 CB:
•
•
•
•
•
•
16
Microplates (MTP) with 6, 24, 48, 96 or 384 wells
Deepwell plates (DWP) with 24, 96 or 384 wells
PCR plates with frame (skirted) with 96 or 384 wells
Filter plates
Tube plates with 96 individual tubes
Rack for microtubes in a 96-well grid
Plates
(see Plates on p. 179)
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Labware
Description
Labware folder/
Thermoadapter
The PCR thermoadapter is used for temperature controlling Adapters
96-well and 384-well PCR plates. However, it does not form (see Thermoadapter on
a fixed combination with a plate.
p. 173)
The thermoadapter DWP/96 is used for temperature
controlling 96-well DWP plates. However, it does not form a
fixed combination with a plate.
Thermoblock
The thermoblock is used for temperature controlling 96-well Thermoblocks with plates
PCR plates (e.g., Eppendorf twin.tec semi-skirted or
(see Thermoblock (384
skirted). It forms a fixed combination with the plate which
wells) on p. 173)
can only be moved together.
Thermoracks
The thermorack with lid holder and 24 positions which can
be temperature controlled is for the temperature control of
smaller tubes (e.g., Eppendorf Safe-Lock tubes for 0.5 mL,
1.5 mL or 2 mL). The thermorack has a high heat capacity
and a slower heat transfer i.e. it retains the temperature
away from the temperature control over a longer time
period. But it also takes longer to reach the desired
temperature.
Equip Racks + Modules
with Tubes
The thermorack TMX with lid holder and 24 positions which
can be temperature controlled is for the temperature-control
of smaller tubes (e.g., Eppendorf Safe-Lock tubes for
0.5 mL, 1.5 mL or 2 mL). It is optimized for the application
in the thermomixer as it is easier than the normal
thermoracks and therefore permits higher rotational speed
during mixing. It has a lower heat capacity but a faster heat
transfer, i.e. it quickly reaches the desired temperature but
does not retain it for long away from the temperature
control.
Equip Racks + Modules
with Tubes
The reservoir rack is for taking up to seven reservoirs or
module racks.
Equip Holder with Tubs +
Modules
more information
Reservoir rack
Product description
Thermoracks TMX
2
(see Thermoracks and
thermoracks TMX on
p. 171)
(see Thermoracks and
thermoracks TMX on
p. 171)
(see Reservoirs and
reservoir rack on p. 174)
Reservoirs (tubs)
To supply liquids, reservoirs in sizes 30 mL and 100 mL are Equip Holder with Tubs +
available. The reservoir rack carries up to seven reservoirs. Modules
(see Reservoirs and
reservoir rack on p. 174)
For larger volumes, an autoclavable reservoir with a
capacity of 400 mL is available.
Tubs
17
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Labware
Description
Module racks
TC reservoir rack modules (temperature controlled) are
loaded with tubes and placed in the reservoir rack in the
form of module racks.
Labware folder/
more information
Equip Holder with Tubs +
Modules
(see Reservoir rack with
module racks on p. 175)
Product description
2
Tips
Tips
epT.I.P.S. Motion are pipette tips for single use with the
epMotion. They are available in three volume sizes to suit (see epT.I.P.S. Motion on
the dispensing tools (50 µL, 300 µL and 1000 µL), in each p. 168)
case with or without filter. epT.I.P.S. Motion are available as
racks or reloads.
Tip Holder
The Tip Holder is an adapter for holding the epT.I.P.S.
Motion Reloads.
2.4.3
Important volume terms for tubes and wells
The following remarks about volume terms are significant for selecting suitable tubes and plates
and for some of the sequences when editing a method.
1.5
Filling volume
Working volume
1.0
0.5
0.1
Optical sensor detection limit
Remaining volume removal
2.4.3.1 Filling volume
Maximum filling volume for a tube or well. A much larger volume is rejected by the software with
an error message.
2.4.3.2 Working volume
The working volume for wells is primarily in the range of 50% of max. filling volume. In the case of
larger tubes, the working volume is a correspondingly larger percentage. Statements about
working volume should be understood as recommendations.
Low-contamination dispensing into the well or tube is possible up to the working volume with key
classes of liquid.
18
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
MTP 96/384, PCR 96/384: fluid displacement in the working volume
A
B
A Well filled up to working volume
B Displacement if tip immersed to
maximum depth before aspirating
liquid
2
Product description
When immersing tips in filled wells of 96-well and 384-well plates, volume displacement can
cause the liquid to overflow if the optical sensor is switched off. You can avoid this by not
exceeding the working volume in the wells.
To display the filling volume, click in the Info file window or mark the desired labware in the
worktable mode.
Maximum immersion in wells is possible with all tips for 96-well plates and with 50 µL tips for
384-well plates (generally 1 mm from the bottom of the tube). To do so select in a command
(Sample Transfer, Reagent Transfer) the corresponding aspirate from bottom option
(see Immersion depth and dispensing height on p. 196).
2.4.3.3 Remaining volume
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
The term "remaining volume" refers to the volume which can no longer be aspirated from a tube,
and which is dependent on tube geometry.
The pipette tip is generally immersed 3 mm in the liquid before liquid is aspirated. The pipette tip
is moved downwards during aspiration of liquid. The immersion depth of 3 mm is maintained.
Under standard conditions, liquid can be aspirated up to the following limit data: 1.0 mm gap
between the bottom of the tube and the pipette tip and simultaneously an immersion depth of the
pipette tip into the liquid of 0.7 mm. The immersion depth of the pipette tip reduces at standard
conditions at the tube bottom from 3 mm to 0.7 mm. The remaining volume is therefore
calculated at standard conditions from a filling level of 1.7 mm.
19
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Special cases for remaining volume
The initial immersion depth of 3 mm is included in the liquid type of the method. Higher
immersion depths are only achieved if Aspirate from bottom is used. In the case of very tall tubes
(e.g., primary tubes for blood), immersion to the bottom of the tube is not possible. In these
cases, the remaining volume increases. There are consequently varying remaining volumes
depending on tube type. Shorter 50 µL or 300 µL pipette tips and very tall tubes result in greater
remaining volumes than the long 1000 µL pipette tip. Aspirations of liquid up to the remaining
volume are liable to a greater risk of being incorrect. The curvature of the liquid surface could
trigger falsified aspiration results.
Changing remaining volume
2
Product description
Under standard conditions the smallest distance between the pipette tip and the tube bottom is
1 mm. Exceptions are 30 mL and 100 mL reservoirs where it is 2.5 mm.
Hint!
Note the comments on adjusting bottom tolerance (see Adjusting the labware bottom tolerance
on p. 85).
2.4.3.4 Multidispense
Reverse stroke in multi-dispensing
Abb. 5:
Multidispense before and after reverse stroke
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.1
Fig. 5:
Multidispense before and after reverse stroke
In multidispense, a reverse stroke takes place after aspiration of the liquid. Here the sampled
liquid is returned into the source tube. The volume of the reverse stroke is included in the
aspiration volume and the required volume in the source tube. At the start of the method, these
volumes are automatically included in the calculation of volume by the software.
The reverse stroke is of equal size in all liquids, but varies according to pipette tip.
When dispensing the defined errors for pipetting are exceeded(see Dispensing Tools on p. 156).
Hint!
Extra aspiration in multi-dispensing
Following the reverse stroke, there is more liquid in the pipette tip than is required for the
dispensing steps. This extra aspiration is dispensed after dispensing is complete.
The dispensing of the extra aspiration depends on the tip change. The extra aspiration is
returned to the source tube if no tip change has been defined before the liquid aspiration. The
extra aspiration is dispensed into the waste container if the tips are changed before each
aspiration of liquid.
20
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
When water is multidispensed, the following approximate extra aspirations result for each pipette
tip:
• 50 µL tip: approx. 2.5 µL extra aspiration
• 300 µL tip: approx. 5.0 µL extra aspiration (only about 3.7 µL with single-channel dispensing
tool)
• 1000 µL tip: approx. 35.2 µL extra aspiration
Aspiration volume
Aspiration volume is the volume which can be aspirated and which is required for the task in
question. The volume is calculated at the start of the method from the sum of all aspirations.
Hint!
2
In the case of multidispense, more liquid has to be aspirated for technical reasons than is
calculated from the sum of all dispensing steps.
Product description
The following volumes must be available in the source tube:
• 50 µL tip: approx. 5.8 µL reverse stroke
• 300 µL tip: approx. 45.2 µL reverse stroke (only approx. 16.7 µl with single-channel
dispensing tool)
• 1000 µL tip: approx. 50.3 µL reverse stroke
The reverse stroke is of identical size with all liquids.
Example aspiration volumes with multidispense
A 96-well plate is to be filled with 10 µL water per well by the multidispense method. The
eight-channel dispensing tool TM 50-8 is used. Aspiration is from one reservoir. Tips are not
changed before the next aspiration of liquid.
Total aspiration volumes for multidispense:
•
•
•
•
10 µL for 96 wells: 960 µL
8 x 5.8 µL reverse stroke: 46.4 µL
8 x 2.5 µL extra aspiration: 20 µL
Total: 1026.4 µL
The volume calculation of the software increases the sum total automatically be the remaining
volume that cannot be aspirated from the source tube. We do not recommend using
multidispense for water before a dispensing volume of 3 µL. With small volumes, pipetting always
offers better free-jet capability as well as precision and correctness. With pipetting, only the
required volume is aspirated and dispensed.
2.4.3.6 Required volume
Required volume is the total of "aspirated volume" and "remaining volume" in the tube. The
minimum required volume is calculated at the start with the aid of the number of samples. For
reasons of reliability (meniscus formation varies in the tubes), the "Required Volume" should
always be exceeded.
2.4.3.7 Volume check
Knowledge of the software is required to perform the volume check.
If it is known that the solution for dispensing has a density significantly different from that of water,
check whether this needs to be compensated in the volume entry.
Perform the following check.
1. From the ep user and the Routine folder copy the Fill 96 method to your user directory.
2. Adapt the copied method to your own labware.
3. Weigh the corresponding plate empty.
4. Fill the plate in the epMotion with water with the aid of the modified method.
5. Weigh the plate again.
21
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
6. Repeat the process with the liquid to be tested and another plate.
7. Use the weighing results to perform a volume calculation (mass : density = volume). The
density of water at 20°C is approx. 0.9982 mg/µL; take account of the density depending on
the current temperature when converting (g/mL = mg/µL). In the case of the plate filled with
water, you obtain a statement about the correctness of the dispensing tool for the selected
volume. Assess the result with the test liquid accordingly, taking account of the density.
8. Depending on the result, adapt the volume in the commands. Rule of thumb: a change in
density of 10% for identical dispensing conditions affects the dispensing result by between
0.2% and 1%.
9. Other physical variables (viscosity, vapor pressure, surface tension etc.) of the solution
likewise affect the result.
2
2.4.3.8 Volume correction after optical sensor error message
Knowledge of the software is required to perform volume correction.
Product description
If the optical sensor detects a too high or too low filling level or the (correct) filling level cannot be
detected, a display appears during the Start sequence:
• Maximal volume indicates the maximum filling volume of the tube.
• Minimal volume indicates the required volume for aspiration based on the number of samples.
• Calculated volume is the volume calculated from the tube data and from measuring liquid level.
Perform the appropriate volume corrections at the tube:
• Reduce liquid if Calculated volume is larger than Maximal volume.
• Increase liquid if Calculated volume is smaller than Minimal volume.
Collision as a result of volume correction or changes at the worktable.
NOTICE!
Perform volume correction only at the position displayed.
Do not make any changes to the worktable.
Following volume correction at the tube, you have the following options.
• To perform Liquid Detection again, press the Repeat scan button and OK. Repeat scan can
also be selected, for example, if the optical sensor was unable to perform a successful
detection due to an air bubble in the liquid and this bubble has been removed by knocking etc.
User input should be selected if the filling volume is below the detection limit of the optical
sensor, for example.
Overwrite the preset volume in the bottom input field with the correct volume and then press
OK.
• Select accept level and continue if the displayed volume is to be accepted in a reagent transfer.
The optical sensor then scans the next tube.
• Cancel the method. Select abort and then press OK.
If you happen to be working with several sources, see the comments in the Appendix
(see Pattern with several plates as source or destination tubes on p. 193).
22
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
3
3
3.1
Safety
Safety
Intended use
The device can be used in laboratories for research, development, industrial and routine work
and training and education. Applications include but are not limited to the fields of life sciences,
biotechnology, chemistry, clinical research, routine diagnostics. epMotion 5070 CB automated
pipetting systems are designed for contamination-free, precise and correct measuring and
transferring of liquids. The autoclavable dispensing tools work in a volume range from 1 µL to
1000 µL. The epMotion 5070 CB must be operated in a cleanbench. The epMotion 5070 CB
meets the relevant fundamental requirements of the EC directives and standards listed in the
declaration of conformity. epMotion 5070 CB automated pipetting systems are only to be used in
rooms and must only be used by qualified staff with the appropriate training.
3.2
Information on product liability
In the following cases, the protection provided by the device may be impaired. The liability for the
function of the device passes to the operator if:
3
• The device is not used in accordance with the operating manual.
• The device is used outside of the range of application described in the preceding chapters.
• The owner has made unauthorized modifications to the device.
Safety
3.3
Warnings for intended use
Read the operating manual first and observe the following general safety instructions before
using the epMotion 5070 CB.
Lethal voltages inside the device.
Ensure that the housing is always closed and undamaged so that no parts inside the device
WARNING!
can be contacted by accident.
Do not remove the housing of the device.
Do not allow any liquids to penetrate the inside of the housing.
Do not allow the device to be opened by anyone except service personnel who have been
specifically authorized by Eppendorf.
Electric shock due to damage to device or mains cable.
WARNING!
Only switch on the device if the device and mains cable are undamaged.
Only use devices that have been properly installed or repaired.
In case of danger, disconnect the device from the mains supply.
Danger of explosion!
DANGER!
Do not operate the device in areas where work is completed with explosive substances.
Do not use this device to process any explosive or highly reactive substances.
Do not use this device to process any substances which could create an explosive
atmosphere.
Damage to health due to handling infectious liquids and pathogenic germs.
Observe the national regulations for handling these substances, the biological security level
WARNING!
of your laboratory, the material safety data sheets and the manufacturer's application notes.
Wear personal protective equipment (PPE).
Follow the instructions regarding hygiene, cleaning and decontamination.
Comprehensive information on the regulations for handling germs and biological material in
risk group II or higher can be found in the "Laboratory Biosafety Manual" (source: World
Health Organization, Laboratory Biosafety Manual, in the valid version).
23
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Hazard when using flammable or infectious liquids.
The waste container may contain residues of flammable or infectious liquids in ejected tips.
WARNING!
If you use flammable liquids (e.g., ethanol 98%), treat the waste before disposing of it in
accordance with your laboratory guidelines.
Dispose of infectious material, waste or tips in accordance with national and local safety
regulations.
Risk from incorrect supply voltage
Only connect the device to power supplies which correspond with the electrical requirements
WARNING!
on the nameplate.
Only use sockets with a protective earth (PE) conductor and a suitable mains cable.
Risk of injury from movements by the carrier.
3
WARNING!
The movements by the carrier can lead to injuries when a method is running and the front screen
is open or defective.
Ensure that the front screen of the cleanbench is always closed and undamaged when a
method is running.
Safety
Only use cleanbenches which do not have any additional access points at the side or the
front.
Make sure that no one can reach into the device when a method is running.
Have defective screens replaced without delay.
Do not bypass the light barriers under any circumstances.
Risk to health due to contaminated device.
Perform decontamination before storing or dispatching the device and/or its accessories.
WARNING!
Poor safety due to incorrect accessories and spare parts.
CAUTION!
The use of accessories and spare parts other than those recommended by Eppendorf may
impair the safety, function and precision of the device. Eppendorf cannot be held liable or accept
any liability for damage resulting from the use of incorrect or non-recommended accessories and
spare parts or from the improper use of such equipment.
Only use accessories and original spare parts recommended by Eppendorf.
Damage to health due to ergonomically inadequate workstation.
Follow the national regulations governing ergonomics of display workstations.
CAUTION!
Damage and corrosion from spilled liquids.
NOTICE!
Disconnect the power plug if relatively large quantities of liquid are involved.
Mop up spilled liquids immediately. When mopping up, pay particular attention to
specifications in the safety data sheet.
Do not make long-term use of chemicals which form aggressive vapors (e.g., 37%
hydrochloric acid). Aggressive vapors and chemicals can cause color changes to the surface
or, in the course of time, cause damage to the moving parts and electronics.
24
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Damage to the device from the device tilting.
NOTICE!
Note that during transport epMotion 5070 CB the center of gravity is at the back.
Follow national safety regulations regarding the transport of heavy loads.
Carry the epMotion 5070 CB using at least two people and reach underneath the device at
the sides.
Place it on an even and strong work surface epMotion 5070 CB of sufficient bearing capacity.
The device must not be placed on a trolley or at an angle. Check that it is horizontal using a
spirit level if necessary.
Damage from overheating.
NOTICE!
Do not place the device close to sources of heat (e.g., radiator, drying cabinet).
Do not expose the device to direct sunlight.
Ensure free circulation of air by maintaining a distance of at least 6 cm from adjacent devices
and the wall, on all sides of the device, and keep the underside of the device clear.
3
Impaired function due to vibration.
Do not place the epMotion 5070 CB on a surface with devices which generate vibration
(e.g.,vortex mixer, thermomixer, centrifuges).
Safety
NOTICE!
Size of disposables can change through autoclaving.
Do not use autoclaved disposable products in automated applications.
NOTICE!
Faults caused by additionally installed software.
Temporary installed software can also cause faults.
NOTICE!
Only use software preinstalled by Eppendorf.
Any additionally required software must be approved by Eppendorf.
Data loss due to lack of data backup or incorrect storage of data carriers.
NOTICE!
epBlue saves all information on user accounts, applications, labware and logfiles in a database
on the epMotion PC. Damage to this database (e.g., due to a hardware fault) causes this
information to be lost.
Carry out regular database backups via the function Backup in Admin tab.
Save the backup file on a secure data carrier and store it in accordance with the manufacturer
instructions.
Eppendorf is not liable for data loss and its consequences.
25
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
3.4
Safety devices
This section explains the warning symbols on the epMotion and Labware and the location of the
safety devices.
1
2
Safety
3
1
WARNING
General hazard point. Follow the operating manual
and in particular the safety notes.
2
WARNING
Do not reach into the device when a method is
running!
The front screen of the cleanbench protects the user during operation of the device. A method
can only be started if the front screen is closed. If the front screen of the cleanbench is opened
with a method running, an error message will be issued and the method stopped.
Risk of injury from movements by the carrier.
WARNING!
The movements by the carrier can lead to injuries when a method is running and the front screen
is open or defective.
Ensure that the front screen of the cleanbench is always closed and undamaged when a
method is running.
Only use cleanbenches which do not have any additional access points at the side or the
front.
Make sure that no one can reach into the device when a method is running.
Have defective screens replaced without delay.
Do not bypass the light barriers under any circumstances.
26
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Risk of injury from movements by the carrier.
WARNING!
Press the Stop key on the control panel.
Wait until the carrier has completed its movements.
Only open the front cover of the cleanbench when all the movements are complete.
1
3
Safety
1
WARNING
Burns from hot surfaces.
1. Do not touch the reservoir rack after an
interruption or after the completion of a method.
2. Wait until the reservoir rack has cooled down.
27
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
4
4
Installation
Installation
Hint!
Installation
4
28
Installation of epMotion 5070 CB must always be carried out by Eppendorf AG or an
Eppendorf AG service partner.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5
5
Operation
Operation
Operation
Damage from UV radiation.
NOTICE!
UV radiation can cause color changes to the surface or, in the course of time, cause damage to
the moving parts and electronics of the epMotion.
Avoid UV radiation.
5.1
First steps
5.1.1
Check correct installation
The epMotion 5070 CB may only be installed by personnel authorized by Eppendorf.
Hint!
Before using the epMotion 5070 CB for the first time, please ensure
1. that the epMotion 5070 CB has been correctly connected and commissioned.
2. that the device is not damaged in any way
3. that the cleanbench screens are not damaged in any way and the laminar ventilation flow is
ensured.
4. that parallel work under the cleanbench with a running method of epMotion 5070 CB is not
possible
Hint!
5.1.2
No warranty can be accepted for the proper functioning of the light barriers if the position of the
epMotion in the cleanbench or the light reflectors on the front screen of the cleanbench is
changed after installation by personnel authorized by Eppendorf.
Creating the first user account
In order to be able to use epBlue, an operator's user account must be configured. It is
recommended that you create individual user accounts for every operator who will use the
epMotion 5070 CB.
This section describes how, as administrator, you can create the first user account. Additional
information on user accounts and user groups and their administration can be found in the
extensive description of the Admin tab (see The Admin tab on p. 97).
1. Start epBlue and log in as administrator (see The Admin tab on p. 97).
2. Go to the administrator area and click there on the Admin tab on the left-hand side of the
program window.
29
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
3. In the left-hand area of the Admin tab select the Account entry so that it is highlighted, and
then select the Edit Account tab.
4. Click on New Account.
The following form is displayed.
5. In the Account field, enter an account name for the new user.
6. In the Password and Confirm password fields, enter the password for the new user account. If
the entries in the two fields do not match exactly, a message will be displayed. In this case,
delete the contents of both fields and enter the password again.
7. In the Member of section, activate the user group to which you want the new user to belong.
The user will have the user rights defined for the selected group (see Group overview on
p. 107).
8. If you want the user account to be active only until a certain date, deactivate the never option
in the Password expires section, and set an expiry date.
This will create a temporary account which automatically expires on the specified date. An
expired account can be reactivated later by the administrator (see The Admin tab on p. 97).
9. If you wish, you can enter further information about the new user, e.g., the user's name and
contact information. This information is optional. If you enter the name of the user he or she
will be addressed by this name in the Home tab after login. Otherwise the account name will
appear.
30
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
10. Click on Submit.
The new user account is created. The user name appears in the Account List in the
Edit Account tab.
Operation
11. If required, create further user accounts in the same way.
12. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.2
Installing or replacing the dispensing tool (tool)
This section describes how to install or replace the dispensing tool required for your method.
Abb. 1:
Carrier with optical sensor
1
2
3
4
Fig. 1:
Carrier with optical sensor
1
Carrier
2
Lever
3
Dispensing tool (here single channel
dispensing tool)
4
Optical sensor
Damage to the gold contacts from handling.
NOTICE!
The connection to the PCB of the dispensing tool is interfered with or interrupted if the gold
contacts on the dispensing tool are damaged or dirtied.
Do not touch the gold contacts.
31
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.2.1
Installing the dispensing tool
Perform the following steps in the sequence described.
Operation
1. Slide the lever at the carrier all the way to the right.
2. Hold the dispensing tool in your hand and rotate it until the blue label and the volume range
indication on the top bar faces you.
The ejector pin of the dispensing tool is now on the left. In eight channel dispensing tools the
channels are aligned in the Y direction (i.e. from the back to the front).
3. Slide the dispensing tool from below into the opening of the tool holder in the carrier up to the
stop.
4. Slide the lever at the carrier all the way to the left. If the lever cannot be moved press the
dispensing tool even harder into the opening of the carrier.
Hint!
If you press too hard against the carrier when installing the dispensing tool, it can slip back.
However, it does not matter if the carrier slips.
5. Check the tight fit of the dispensing tool.
The dispensing tool is now installed.
Check the tight fit of the dispensing tool regularly.
Hint!
5.2.2
Removing the dispensing tool
Perform the following steps in the sequence described.
1. Hold the dispensing tool firmly in your hand.
2. Slide the lever at the carrier all the way to the right.
3. Pull the dispensing tool all the way down.
The dispensing tool has now been removed and you can install a different one as described
above.
5.2.3
Notes on the dispensing sequence
Eight channel dispensing tools are only moved in the X direction (from left to right) over a 96 well
plate.
During dispensing in 384 well plates eight channel dispensing tools can also execute a step in the
Y direction (from the back to the front). All channels of the eight channel dispensing tool are
always filled, i.e. liquid is dispensed from all channels. In the 384 well plates only every second
well of a 16 well column is reached by the eight channel dispensing tool. However, using the
above-mentioned Y step liquid can be added or aspired from every well in a 16 well column of a
384 well plate. Single channel dispensing tools move dependent on their program over a location
in the X and Y direction.
5.3
Placing labware on the worktable
This section provides you with an overview of the supply of labware on the worktable.
Hint!
32
Beyond the preconfigured standard labware available ex works, it is also possible to dimension
individual or external labware for use with the epMotion 5070 CB and to incorporate it in the
labware directories of the software. For more information on this, contact Eppendorf Service.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5.3.1
5
Position labware
Avoid placing very short labware next to very tall labware. Use a Height Adapter to compensate
for the difference in height.
Operation
The lid lies loosely on the tip rack.
NOTICE!
Never grip the tip rack by its lid to lift it up, always by the side. Otherwise it will fall.
Only take off the lid shortly before starting the method. The lid protects the tips from
contamination.
1. Position the Tip Rack in the location on the worktable in accordance with the method. In the
process, the Tip Rack is pressed against the stops on opposite sides by the spring plate at
the location.
2. Remove the lid from the Tip Rack.
3. When using Module Racks: place the filled Reservoir Rack on a "B" location. "A" locations
may not be used.
4. Position the other labware required for your method in any locations. In the process, ensure
that the labware is not tilted.
5. If desired, place a waste bag in the waste container and fix in position using the clamping
ring. Pull the edge of the bag tightly downwards so that the path of the dispensing tool and
access to the racks is not obstructed.
6. After supplying the worktable, close the front screen of the cleanbench.
5.4
Starting and exiting epBlue
5.4.1
Start epBlue and log in with your user account.
Hint!
When the PC boots up, the epBlue server software starts automatically. If the server software is
stopped while the PC is running, you must start it manually before starting epBlue. To start the
server software, select Start - Programs - Eppendorf - epBlue Server from the Windows Start
menu.
To start epBlue, proceed as follows.
1. Double-click on the Eppendorf epBlue icon on the desktop, or
select Start - Programs - Eppendorf - epBlue in the Windows
Start menu.
epBlue starts, and the login screen appears.
33
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Hint!
If you have forgotten your password, please contact your administrator. He can set a new
password for you (see Set up a new password on p. 106).
Operation
Once you are logged in as a user, you can change your own password at any time. To do so,
select Tools - Account - Change Password from the main menu.
2. Enter your account name and your password.
3. Click on Login.
epBlue starts and the program window displays the Home tab.
The number and type of tabs on the left hand edge of the epBlue window depends on your
user rights and your epBlue configuration level.
5.4.2
Logging out or exiting epBlue
Hint!
34
You cannot log out of your account or exit epBlue while any of your applications are still running.
If you need to log out or exit before your applications have finished, you must stop them manually
(see The Control tab on p. 80).
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.4.2.1 Logout from your user account
To log out of your account, proceed as follows.
Operation
1. Save any changes you have made to your applications (see Saving the current application on
p. 50) or to your labware (see The Labware tab on p. 82).
2. Select Tools - Account - Log out from the menu or click on the Logout button.
You are logged out of your account.
The login screen appears. A different user can now log in.
5.4.2.2 Exiting epBlue
To exit epBlue, proceed as follows.
1. Save any changes you have made to your applications (see Saving the current application on
p. 50) or to your labware (see The Labware tab on p. 82).
2. Select File - Exit from the menu.
epBlue is closed.
5.5
The Home tab
5.5.1
Overview of the Home tab
epBlue always starts with the Home tab. This tab offers shortcuts to common tasks and allows
you to access your recently used applications quickly.
35
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.5.1.1 Recent applications and common tasks
Operation
In the Recent Applications section you will find a list of the applications you have used recently.
In the Tasks section you can select the most common tasks quickly and easily. Alternatively, all
tasks are also available in the main menu.
5.5.1.2 Icons in the Home tab
In the Home tab the following icons are available in the toolbar under the main menu.
•
•
•
•
•
New... New Application: to create a new application
Open... Open Application / Open Labware: to open an existing application or labware
Save (not active): to save changes to applications or labware
Print (not active): to print applications and logfiles
Logout: to log out of your user account and exit the software
Alternatively, these functions are also available in the File menu.
5.5.2
Open recent application
Hint!
This section describes how to open those applications you have used recently. To open other
applications, please refer to the section describing general file operations in the File Window
(see The file window on p. 37).
The applications you have used recently are displayed in the Recent Applications list in the Home
tab.
To open an application you have used recently, proceed as follows.
1. Click on the application in the Recent Applications.list.
The application opens and the program window changes to the Work tab.
You can now start or edit the application (see The Work tab on p. 48).
36
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.6
The file window
5.6.1
Access to the file window
Operation
The file window allows you to open, create and edit applications, to manage your application files
and folders, and to open some types of labware for editing.
The file window has two modes, depending on the way you access it: it can show either
applications or labware files.
The basic procedures carried out in the file window are described in detail in the following
sections.
Hint!
To avoid loss of data it is recommended to perform regular data backups of all applications and
labware files. If you are logged in as User Level 2, you can backup data at any time. To restore
data from a previous backup, you must be logged in as an administrator.
5.6.1.1 The file window for application files
The file window for application files shows the application files and folders available in your
system.
There are two types of applications:
• Method: an application for epMotion which defines the worktable assignment and steps for
carrying out complex liquid handling procedures. Method files for epMotion can be identified
by their file extension *.dws.
• Program: an application for Mastercycler ep which defines a sequence of temperature
commands and heating and cooling cycles to be carried out with the Mastercycler ep.
Program files for Mastercycler ep can be identified by their file extension *.cyc.
To access the file window for opening and running application files, choose one of the
following ways. If you open an application this way, epBlue will switch directly to the Run tab,
where you can run the application on a compatibly device connected to your system.
• Click on Open / run applications in the Tasks section of the Home tab,
• or click on the Open icon in the icon bar and select Open Application,
• or select File - Open / run applications from the main menu.
To access the file window for creating or editing application files, choose one of the following
ways. Any applications you create and open this way will be displayed in the Worktable, where
you can edit them for use in your system.
• Click on Create / edit applications in the Tasks section of the Home tab,
• or click on the New icon in the icon bar and select New Application,
• or select File - Create / edit applications from the main menu.
37
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Further information on labware is described separately (see Labware on p. 167).
Operation
Hint!
5.6.1.2 File window for labware files
The file window for labware files shows the labware available in your system.
To access the file window for opening and managing labware files, do one of the following:
• Click on Create / edit labware in the Tasks section of the Home tab
• or click on the Open icon in the toolbar and select Open Labware,
• or select File - Create / edit labware from the main menu.
5.6.2
Opening an application
To open an application that you want to run on a device, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. Select a user name in the user list on the left-hand side to gain access to this user's directory
(usually your own).
The folders in the selected user directory are now displayed in the Folder list.
3. In the Folder list select the folder containing the required application.
The applications in the selected folder are now displayed in the Applications list.
4. In the Applications list select the application you want to open.
The properties of the selected application are displayed on the right-hand side.
38
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5. To open the selected application, click on Open Application.
The application opens and epBlue goes to the Work (see The Work tab on p. 48) tab.
Operation
If you opened the application via the Open / run applications command, epBlue goes directly
to the Run tab, where you can start the application on a device connected to your system.
If you opened the application via the Create / edit applications command, epBlue switches to
the Worktable, where you can edit and run the application.
6. Alternatively, you can open an application in read-only mode to prevent accidental changes.
To do so select the application in the Applications list, check the Read only checkbox in the
Applications Properties section and click on Open Application.
The application opens in read-only mode.
You can now run the application, but you cannot edit it.
In the Applications list open applications are displayed with a lock.
Hint!
• A red lock symbol indicates that this application has been opened for editing, either by you or
by another user who has access to the same directory (i.e. an administrator). If an application
is open for editing, it can only be opened in read-only mode by other users.
• A yellow lock symbol indicates that this application has been opened in read-only mode,
either by you or by another user.
5.6.3
Creating a new folder in your user directory
Your user directory contains the applications that you can edit and run on the available devices.
To organize your applications, you can store them in folders which you create in your user
directory.
To create a new folder in your user directory, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. Select your user name in the User list on the left-hand side to gain access to your user
directory.
All folders in your user directory are now displayed in the Folder list.
39
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
The properties of the selected user directory are displayed on the right-hand side.
3. To create a new folder click on New Folder or click on the Create new folder icon above the
Folder list.
A dialog window opens.
4. Enter a name for the new folder. If required, enter a short description of the folder in the
Comment field.
5. Click on Create.
The new folder has been created and is displayed in the Folder list.
40
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5.6.4
5
Creating a new application
This section describes how to create a new empty application. Alternatively, you can duplicate an
existing application (see Duplicating an open application on p. 50) and edit the duplicate. This
allows you to create several similar applications quickly and efficiently.
Operation
Hint!
To create a new application, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. Select a user name in the user list on the left-hand side to gain access to this user's directory
(usually your own).
The folders in the selected user directory are now displayed in the Folder list.
The properties of the selected user directory are displayed on the right-hand side.
You can create a new application either in the top level of the user directory, or in a folder
within the user directory.
3. To create a new application at the top level of the user directory, check that the user has been
selected in the User list, then right click in the Applications list and select New Application in the
context menu or click on the Create new application icon above the Applications list.
4. To create a new application in a folder within the user directory, select the folder in which
you want to create the new application.
The applications in the selected folder are now displayed in the Applications list.
41
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
The properties of the selected folder are displayed on the right-hand side.
5. To create a new application in the selected folder, click on New Application in the properties
section, or right-click in the Applications list and select New Application from the context menu,
or click on the Create new application icon above the Applications list.
A dialog window opens.
6. Enter a name for the new application. If required, enter a short description of the application
in the Comment field.
7. Select the device type for which the new application is intended.
The following options are available:
• epMotion: a method for epMotion.
• Cycler: a program for Mastercycler ep.
8. Click on Create.
The new application has been created and is displayed in the Applications list.
If you have created the application at the top level of the user directory, the user directory is
now also included in the Folder list. Its name displayed in brackets.
You can now open the new application (see Opening an application on p. 38) and edit it in the
Work tab (see The Work tab on p. 48).
5.6.5
Copying applications and folders from other user directories to one's own
The ep directory contains standard Eppendorf applications. These applications are read-only
and cannot be edited or run directly. However, you can copy them to your own directory in order
to edit them or to run them on a device. In the same way, you can copy existing applications from
other user's directories and adapt them to your own requirements.
42
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
To copy an application or folder from another user's directory to your own, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
Operation
2. In the User list select on the left-hand side the user directory containing the application or
folder you want to copy.
The folders in the selected user directory are displayed in the Folder list.
3. To copy a folder, select the folder in the Folder list, click on the Cut+Copy+Paste icon above
the Folder list and select Copy or right click on the folder and select Copy in the context menu.
The folder is copied into the computer clipboard.
4. To copy an application, select the folder which contains the required application.
The applications in the selected folder are now displayed in the Applications list.
5. In the Applications list select the application you want to copy.
The properties of the selected application are displayed on the right-hand side.
6. Click on the Cut+Copy+Paste icon above the Applications list and select Copy.
The application is copied into the computer clipboard.
7. In the User list select on the left-hand side your own user directory.
8. To insert a copied folder into your user directory, click on the Cut+Copy+Paste icon above
the Folder list and select Paste.
The copied folder is inserted into your user directory.
9. To insert a copied application, select the folder into which you want to insert the
application.
The applications in the selected folder are now displayed in the Applications list.
10. Click on the Cut+Copy+Paste icon above the Applications list and select Paste.
The copied application is inserted into the selected folder in your own user directory.
You can now run or edit the application or applications in the copied folder (see The Work tab
on p. 48).
Hint!
5.6.6
If the worktable of the copied application does not match that of the connected epMotion, you will
not be able to execute the application. In this case, save the application with Save as... under a
new name with the suitable worktable.
Editing folder and application properties
To edit the properties of a folder or application, proceed as follows
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. To edit the properties of a folder select the folder in the Folder list.
3. To edit the properties of an application select it in the Applications list.
The properties of the selected folder or application are displayed on the right-hand side.
43
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
4. Click on Edit properties.
A dialog window opens. You can now edit the following properties.
Operation
• Name: The name of the folder or application.
• Comment: A short description of the folder or application.
• Read only (for applications): If this option is active, the application can be opened and
started, but it cannot be edited, to protect it against accidental changes.
5. To save the changes, click on Save.
6. To exit the properties without changes, click on Cancel.
5.6.7
Deleting applications and folders
You can delete applications and folders from your own user directory. The applications and
folders in the ep directory cannot be edited or deleted.
To delete applications or folders, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. To delete a folder select the folder in the Folder list and click on the Delete icon above the
Folder list.
3. To delete an application select it in the Applications list and click on the Delete icon above the
Applications list.
A warning message appears.
4. To confirm, click on Yes.
The selected folder or application is deleted.
5.6.8
Import applications
You can import applications from your hard disk or from a USB storage device into epBlue.
The following file formats can be imported:
• method files for epMotion (file extension *.dws)
• program files for Mastercycler ep (file extension *.cyc)
• older method files (file extensions *.ws or *.lhs)
To import applications, proceed as follows:
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. Select the target directory and click on the Import Applications icon above the Folder list.
3. Alternatively click on the Import Applications icon above the Applications list.
The import window opens.
44
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
4. Click on Add and select the files you want to import from your hard disk or USB storage
device.
5. If you are importing older method files with the file extensions *.ws or *.lhs, check the
checkbox to replace these older file extensions with the new extension *.dws.
6. Click on OK to import the selected applications.
The applications are imported into epBlue.
5.6.9
Exporting applications
You can export application files to your hard disk or to a USB storage device.
To export applications, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. To export all applications to a folder select the folder in the Folder list and click on the Export
Selected Applications icon above the Folder list.
3. To export an individual application select the application in the Applications list and click on
the Export Selected Application icon above the Applications list.
4. Select a target folder for the application files, click on OK and confirm the message to export
the selected files.
The files are exported to the specified folder.
Exported epBlue applications cannot be used for the control panel.
Hint!
45
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.6.10
Open labware for editing
Operation
This section describes how to open a labware file in the file window. For a more detailed
description of the editing steps and labware types that can be edited see the description of the
Labware tab (see The Labware tab on p. 82).
This function is only available if you have the necessary user rights.
Hint!
To open labware for editing, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. In the Folder list on the left-hand side select the labware folder containing the labware you
want to edit.
If there are subfolders, these are displayed in the Subfolder list.
3. If required, select the subfolder.
The labware in this folder is displayed in the Labware list.
4. In the Labware list select the labware you want to open.
The properties of the selected labware are displayed on the right-hand side.
5. To open the selected labware, click on Open Labware.
The labware opens and the program window changes to the Labware tab.
You can edit the labware, or create new labware or labware combinations for use in your
applications. You can equip racks or modules with tubes (see p. 86), and you can equip
reservoir racks with various reservoirs and equipped modules (see p. 90).
46
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5.6.11
5
Deleting a labware combination
You can delete only labware combinations created by yourself or by other users in your system.
Labware identified in the Labware Properties section as Eppendorf Standard Labware cannot be
deleted.
Operation
Hint!
To delete a labware combination you have created, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. In the Folder and Subfolder lists select the labware folder containing the labware you want to
delete.
The labware in this folder is displayed in the Labware list. Eppendorf Standard Labware is
displayed in blue, it cannot be deleted.
3. Select the labware you want to delete and click on the Delete icon above the Labware list.
A warning message appears.
4. To confirm, click on Yes.
The labware is deleted.
47
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Operation
5
5.7
The Work tab
5.7.1
Overview of the Work tab
Hint!
If the Work tab is empty when opened, you first have to open an application via the Home tab
(see The Home tab on p. 35) or the file window (see Opening an application on p. 38).
epBlue automatically changes to the Work tab if you have opened an application via the Home
tab or the file window. You can also access the empty Work tab by clicking with the mouse. In the
Work tab you can edit your own applications and start them on the available devices.
5.7.1.1 List of open applications
On the left-hand side of the Work tab a list with all open applications is displayed. Several
applications can be open at the same time and can be edited or run in parallel. The current
application is highlighted. To switch between the applications, click on the application names in
the list.
48
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
There are two types of applications:
• Method: an application for epMotion which defines the worktable assignment and steps for
carrying out complex liquid handling procedures.
• Program: an application for Mastercycler ep which defines a sequence of temperature
commands and heating and cooling cycles to be carried out with the Mastercycler ep.
5.7.1.2 Tabs for editing and running epMotion-applications (methods)
If you have opened a method (i.e. an application for epMotion), the Work tab displays several
tabs:
• Worktable: In the Worktable tab you equip your worktable with the labware required for the
method (see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on p. 53).
• Procedure: In the Procedure tab you define the sequence of the commands to be executed
when the method is run (see Procedure tab - defining a procedure on p. 57).
• Run: With the Run tab you can start your method on one or several devices available in your
system (see The Run tab on p. 74).
• Control: In the Control tab you can monitor and control the devices on which your method is
currently running (see The Control tab on p. 80).
5.7.1.3 Icons in the Work tab for epMotion applications (methods)
When you have opened a method (i.e. an application for epMotion), the Work tab displays the
following icons in the toolbar below the main menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
New... New Application: to create a new application for editing
Open... Open Application/Labware: to open an existing application/labware
Save: to save changes to your methods
Print: to print a report
Logout: to log out of your user account and exit the software
Copy (only active in the Procedure tab): to copy objects (commands) to the clipboard of the
computer.
• Paste (only active in the Procedure tab): to insert objects (commands) from the clipboard of
the computer.
• Delete (only active in the Procedure tab): to delete a selected object (command).
• CSV Import (only active in the Procedure tab): to import commands from a CSV file to the
Procedure.
• Check Method (only active in the Procedure tab): to check method parameters.
• Start Method: to start a method on a device.
Alternatively, these functions are also available in the File menu.
Additional information on the selection of tasks, e.g., opening or creating methods or managing
method files and folders, can be found in the detailed description of the Home (see The Home tab
on p. 35) tab and in the file window (see The file window on p. 37).
49
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.1.4 Duplicating an open application
If an application is read-only or is running on a device, it is protected and cannot be edited.
However, you can create a duplicate which you can edit.
Operation
To create a duplicate of an open application, proceed as follows.
1. Select the application in the list of open applications on the left-hand side.
2. Right-click on the application name and select Duplicate from the context menu.
The file window opens.
The duplicate application is created and displayed in the Applications list. The file name of the
duplicate application is a copy of the name of the original application file plus a number in
brackets. If you create more than one duplicate of the same original application, the
duplicates are numbered consecutively.
You can now open the duplicate application or edit its properties (see The file window on
p. 37).
5.7.1.5 Saving the current application
To save the current application, proceed as follows.
1. Select the application in the list of open applications on the left-hand side of the Work tab.
The current application is highlighted in darker blue.
2. To save the application under the same name, click on the Save icon, or select File - Save from
the main menu, or right-click on the application name and select Save from the context menu.
50
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
3. To save the application under a new name, select File - Save As from the main menu, or
right-click on the application name and select Save As from the context menu.
Operation
A dialog window opens.
4. Enter a file name and click on Save.
The application is saved in your user directory.
5.7.1.6 Printing applications and logfiles
You can print a description of the current application, e.g., the worktable assignment and
procedure of commands defined in a method.
When the application has been executed on a device connected to your system, you can also
print the logfiles of every individual run. The logfiles record every program step carried out by the
device (see Reading logfiles on p. 81).
To print an application or its logfiles, proceed as follows.
1. Select the application in the list of open applications on the left-hand side of the Work tab.
The current application is highlighted. To print the method, select the worktable. To print a
logfile of the method, select the Logs tab.
2. Click on the Print icon, or select File - Print from the main menu.
The print window opens.
3. Select Print Method if you want to print a description of the application. Select Print Logfile if
you want to print the logfile of a previous run of this application, and select the device and the
required logfile from the list below.
4. To print the application or logfile on the standard printer configured in your system, click on
Print.
51
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
5. To display the application or logfile in a separate window, click on Preview. The Preview
window opens.
In the Preview window, the following icons are available (from left to right):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search: to search the document text.
Print: to select a printer and print the document.
Print Direct: to print the document on the standard printer configured in your system.
Page Setup: to change the page setup before printing.
Hand Tool: to navigate by dragging the document up or down with the mouse.
Magnifier: to toggle the zoom factor between 100% and full-page view.
Zoom / Zoom Out / Zoom In: to adjust the zoom factor.
First / Previous / Next / Last Page: to navigate through the document pages.
Multiple Pages: to specify the number of pages displayed in the Preview window.
Background / Watermark: to change the background color and to insert a watermark.
Export Document: to export the document to a file (e.g., pdf, txt, csv or xls).
Send E-mail: to distribute the document via e-mail.
Close Preview: to close the Preview window.
6. Print or export the document as required, using the icons in the Preview window, as described
above.
7. To exit the preview, click on the Close Preview icon, or select File - Exit, or close the Preview
window.
8. To close the print window, click on Cancel.
52
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5.7.2
5
Worktable tab - equip the worktable
In the Worktable tab you equip worktable of the epMotion with the labware required for the
method.
Operation
To go to the Worktable tab select the Work tab on the left-hand side of the program window and
select the Worktable tab.
The Worktable tab is divided into 3 sections.
The Worktable (section 1) is displayed in the top right section of the Worktable tab. It shows the
worktable assignment for the active method. You can edit the worktable with the mouse, add and
remove labware or move labware to a different location on the worktable.
The Labware list (section 2) is displayed in the bottom section of the Worktable tab. It contains the
available labware that you can place on the worktable.
The Placement list (section 3) is displayed in the top left section of the Worktable tab. It shows a
list of all occupied worktable locations and the labware placed at each location.
53
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.2.1 Positioning labware on the worktable
To position labware on the worktable, proceed as follows.
Operation
1. In the Labware Type list select the type of labware you want to use (e.g., "Plates").
If there are subgroups they are displayed in the Sub-Type list.
2. In the Sub-Type list select the subgroup you want to use (e.g., "mtp96").
The available labware of this type is displayed in the Labware list.
3. In the Labware list select the labware you want to position on the worktable (e.g.,
"CO_MTP_360_1").
Some information on the selected labware is displayed on the right-hand side.
4. To position the labware on the worktable, press the left mouse button and keep it pressed,
dragging the labware upwards from the list.
Hint!
While you are dragging the labware, it is attached to the mouse pointer by its upper left-hand
corner. To position the labware on the worktable, direct the mouse pointer (not the center of the
labware icon) to the intended location. The mouse pointer carries a small "+" (plus) symbol if the
labware can be positioned at the current location.
5. Drag the labware to its intended location on the worktable and drop it there by releasing the
mouse button.
A dialog window opens which allows you to change the settings for this labware.
6. If required, edit the name of the labware in the Name field.
54
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
7. If the optical sensor is to perform liquid detection at this location during the method, then set
the desired option.
The following options are available:
Operation
• Off: Liquid detection is switched off at this location. If you use this option, click in the
Volume field and specify a volume for the labware.
• Random Access: The optical sensor performs liquid detection at a few randomly-selected
positions of this labware.
• All Positions: The optical sensor performs liquid detection at all positions of this labware. It
is not recommended to select this option for racks and plates with 96 positions, as this is
time-consuming.
If required, you can always edit these settings again later (see Editing labware properties on
the worktable on p. 56).
8. Click on OK to confirm the settings.
The labware is positioned in the location.
9. Proceed in the same way to supply the other locations on the worktable.
The labware on the worktable is also displayed in the Placement list on the left-hand side of the
Worktable tab.
When positioning labware, please note the following restrictions:
Hint!
• all A locations: no reservoir rack.
To check whether a particular labware item can be positioned in a location, try dragging the
labware over that location and observe the shape of the mouse pointer: the labware can be
positioned only if the mouse pointer carries a "+" (plus) symbol.
5.7.2.2 Stacking labware at a location
You can stack certain labware components at a location one above the other, e.g., selected
plates or a height adapter and a plate.
In the locations you can stack a maximum of five predefined plates from Eppendorf. The
maximum stacking height is 126 mm. The following plates can be stacked in a location:
•
•
•
•
•
EP_pDNA_96_MTP
EP_TT_PCR_150
EP_TT_PCR_40
EP_DWP_1200
EP_pDNA_96_DWP
To stack labware at a location, the specifications (geometry, name, bottom tolerance etc.) of the
plates must be the same.
Hint!
Additional labware suitable for stacking is available for download in the VIP section at
www.epMotion.com. To download and import this labware, carry out a labware update.
55
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Dispensing operations are not possible from a plate stack.
Operation
The optical sensor can perform location detection. Liquid detection is not possible.
Hint!
When stacking plates, ensure that the filling level is adapted. The working volume should not be
exceeded.
When stacking labware, always proceed in just the same way as when normally positioning
individual labware components (see Positioning labware on the worktable on p. 54).
To stack labware at a location, proceed as follows.
1. Select and position the labware which is to be located in the bottom location (e.g., a height
adapter.
2. Select and position the labware which is to be located at the same top location (e.g., a plate).
Proceed in just the same way as when positioning the bottom labware component.
The two labware components are displayed in the location. The number of stacked items is
displayed in brackets next to the location name.
The stacked labware components are also displayed in the Placement list on the left-hand
side of the Worktable tab.
5.7.2.3 Editing labware properties on the worktable
You can edit the labware properties also for labware already placed onto the worktable.
Hint!
To display and edit the properties of labware on the worktable, proceed as follows.
56
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
1. Double click on the labware on the worktable or right click on the labware in the Placement list
and select Properties from the context menu.
Operation
2. To edit the properties of stacked labware further down in the stack (e.g., a height adapter),
right click on the labware in the Placement list and select Properties from the context menu.
This labware can only be accessed via the Placement list.
A dialog window opens which allows you to change the settings for this labware.
3. If required, edit the name of the labware in the Name field.
4. If the optical sensor is to perform liquid detection at this location during the method, then set
the desired option.
The following options are available:
• Off: Liquid detection is switched off at this location. If you use this option, click in the
Volume field and specify a volume for the labware.
• Random Access: The optical sensor performs liquid detection at a few randomly-selected
positions of this labware.
• All Positions: The optical sensor performs liquid detection at all positions of this labware. It
is not recommended to select this option for racks and plates with 96 positions, as this is
time-consuming.
5. Click on OK to confirm the settings.
The changed labware properties are active.
5.7.2.4 Remove labware from the Worktable
To remove labware from the worktable, proceed as follows.
1. Right-click on the labware on the worktable or right-click on the labware in the Placement list
and select Properties from the context menu.
2. Or drag the labware from its location on the worktable to the waste position with the
mouse,and drop it there.
The labware is removed from the worktable and also from the Placement list.
5.7.3
Procedure tab - defining a procedure
In the Procedure tab you can define the sequence of the commands to be executed when the
method is run. It is recommended to first equip the worktable with the required labware before
changing to the Procedure tab (see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on p. 53).
To go to the Procedure tab select the Work tab on the left-hand side of the program window and
select the Procedure tab.
57
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Operation
5
The Procedure tab is divided into 4 sections.
The Worktable (section 1) is displayed in the top right section of the Procedure tab. It shows the
current worktable assignment for the active method. To edit the worktable you have to change to
the Worktable tab (see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on p. 53).
The Procedure list (section 2) is displayed on the left-hand side of the Procedure tab. It shows the
procedure as a list of commands, in the order in which they will be executed.
The Parameter section (section 3) is displayed in the bottom right section of the Procedure tab. It
shows the parameters for the command which is currently selected in section 2. You can edit
these parameters.
The Commands section (section 4) is displayed on the left-hand side under the Procedure list. It
contains icons for all the commands you can use to define a procedure.
5.7.3.1 Overview of the available commands
All available commands are displayed as icons in the Commands section under the Procedure
list.
Hint!
58
This section gives you only a brief overview of the commands. Details on all commands and their
parameters are included in the reference list (see Reference list of commands and parameters on
p. 68).
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
The following commands are available for defining a procedure.
Operation
Number of Samples: Use the Number of Samples command to specify how
many samples are to be processed in the subsequent steps of the procedure. The
command can be used several times in a method to change the number of
samples during the sequence of the procedure.
Sample Transfer: Use the Sample Transfer command to transfer samples from
different locations of the source tube labware to different locations of the
destination tube labware.
Reagent Transfer: Use the Reagent Transfer command to transfer samples from
different locations of the source tube labware to different locations of the
destination tube labware.
Dilute: The Dilute command is a modified Sample Transfer command making it
easier to carry out diluting series. A defined volume is transported from one well to
the next several times by means of pipetting.
Pool: The Pool command is used to transfer liquids from several source tube
locations to a single destination tube location. For example, the contents of several
source tube labware wells can be pooled in a new destination tube labware well.
Pool One Destination: With the Pool One Destination command you can
transfer liquids from several source tube locations to a single destination tube
location. This command is a simplified Pool command.
Mix: Use the Mix command to mix liquids at one location.
Wait: Use the Wait command to define a definite pause before the next step. The
procedure continues automatically after the specified time has elapsed.
Comment: Use the Comment command to enter a comment line to be displayed
at a specific location in the Procedure.
Exchange: The Exchange command is used to move labware to the location in
the current method.
User Intervention: Use the User Intervention command to insert steps into your
method which the user has to execute manually. The procedure only continues
after the operator has confirmed the display message.
5.7.3.2 Adding a command to the program
To add a command to the program, proceed as follows.
1. To insert a command anywhere in the program (either in the procedure or at the end) click on
the Command icon in the Command section in the Procedure tab, e.g., on the Sample Transfer
icon, drag the command to the top and drop it in the desired procedure location.
59
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
2. To append a command to the end of the procedure, double-click on the command icon in the
Command section in the Procedure tab, e.g., on the Sample Transfer icon.
Operation
The command is added to the procedure.
The command parameters are displayed in the Parameter section of the Procedure tab.
3. Click on the Parameters, Options, Mix and Liquid Type tabs in the Parameter section to edit the
command parameters as required by your method (see Editing the parameters and options of
a command on p. 61).
The example shows the Sample Transfer command. Other commands can have different
options in the Parameter section in the Procedure tab. Details on all commands and their
parameters are included in the reference list (see Reference list of commands and
parameters on p. 68).
4. Complete the procedure by adding other commands in the same way.
In addition to adding commands in the ways described above, you can also move a command
up or down within the procedure (see p. 60), copy a command including its parameters and
options (see p. 60), or delete a command from the procedure (see p. 61).
5.7.3.3 Moving a command up or down in the procedure
To move a command to a different position in the procedure, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab click on the command you want to move, drag it up
or down with the mouse and drop it at the new location.
The command is moved to the new location.
5.7.3.4 Duplicating a command
To duplicate a command, including its parameters and options, and insert the duplicate into the
procedure, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the original command and make sure that the
parameters and options have been defined as necessary.
2. Click on the Copy icon, or right-click on the command and select Copy from the context menu.
3. Select the command below the position in which you want to insert the duplicate, right-click
and select Paste before from the context menu.
The command is duplicated and the duplicate is inserted at the chosen position.
You can now edit the parameters of the original command and the duplicate independently of
each other.
60
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.3.5 Removing commands from the procedure
To remove one or several commands from the procedure, proceed as follows.
Operation
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to remove.
2. To select a sequence of commands, click on the first command in the sequence, then press
the Shift key on the keyboard and click on the last command in the sequence.
3. Press the Del key on the keyboard, or right-click on the command or sequence of commands
and select Delete from the context menu.
A warning message appears.
4. To delete, click on OK.
The command or sequence of commands is removed from the procedure.
5.7.3.6 Editing the parameters and options of a command
Each command has its own set of parameters, which you can edit at any time while you are
creating or editing a procedure.
To edit the parameters and options for a command, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to edit, e.g., a Sample
Transfer command.
The command parameters are displayed in the Parameter section.
61
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
2. Select a dispensing tool from the Pipet. Tool list. If you are using filter tips, activate the Filter
Tips option.
Operation
3. First set the volume to be dispensed (Volume) and select the Transfer Type (Pipette or
Multidispense).
4. Select the source tube (Source) and the destination tube (Destination) for the command
(see Define the source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer on
p. 62).
5. Specify the Pattern for the command (see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on
p. 64)
6. To specify further options for the command (e.g., Liquid Type, settings for mixing and changing
tips), click on the Options, Mix and Liquid Type tabs in the Parameter section to edit the
parameters according to the requirements of your method.
7. To discard the changes, click immediately on Discard Changes under the Parameter section
before selecting a different command in the Procedure list.
8. To accept the changes, click on Apply Changes under the Parameter section or select a
different command in the Procedure list.
The example shows the Sample Transfer command. Other commands may have different
options in the Parameter section in the Procedure tab. For a detailed description of the available
parameters and options for each command, see the reference list of commands (see Reference
list of commands and parameters on p. 68).
5.7.3.7 Define the source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer
You can define up to 4 source tube and destination tube locations for each Transfer command.
To use labware as source or destination for a Transfer command the labware must first have
been positioned on the worktable (see Positioning labware on the worktable on p. 54).
Within one Transfer command you can define up to 4 labware locations for source tubes and up
to 4 locations for destination tubes. The second and all further labware locations must be
compatible with the first labware selected.
There are 2 options for defining source and destination tubes for a Transfer command:
• You can select source and destination tube labware from a list with labware objects
positioned on the worktable (see p. 62).
• Immediately after adding a command to the procedure you can define a source and
destination tube via mouse click (see p. 63).
Selecting source tube and destination tube from a list
You can select up to 4 source tube and destination tube locations by selecting labware from a list
of labware items positioned on the worktable. To do so, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to edit, e.g., a Sample
Transfer command.
2. In the Parameter section select the first source tube labware from the list.
The list for the next location becomes active automatically. The second list shows only
labware on the worktable which is compatible with the first selected labware location.
62
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
3. Specify further source tube locations in the same way, if required.
4. Select the destination tube labware in the same manner.
Operation
The source tube and destination tube locations for this command are active immediately.
Clicking on source and destination with the mouse
You can define up to 4 source tube and destination tube locations by clicking with the mouse
(only possible immediately after you have added the command to the procedure). To do so,
proceed as follows.
1. Add a command to the procedure, e.g., a Sample Transfer command (see Adding a
command to the program on p. 59).
2. Immediately after adding the command, move the mouse over the worktable.
The mouse pointer changes into a dispensing tool symbol.
3. Click on the first source tube labware on the worktable.
The selected source tube labware is highlighted in blue and the Source list in the Parameter
section displays the name of the labware at the top.
4. If required, select further source tube locations by clicking with the mouse (up to 4 locations).
They are also highlighted in blue and displayed as source tube locations in the Parameter
section.
5. To define the destination tube labware, press the Ctrl key on the keyboard and keep it
pressed while clicking on the first destination tube labware on the worktable.
The selected destination tube labware is highlighted in red and the Destination list in the
Parameter section displays the name of the labware at the top.
6. If required, select further destination locations by holding the Ctrl key and clicking with the
mouse (up to 4 locations).
They are also highlighted in red and displayed as destination tube locations in the Parameter
section.
The source and destination locations for this command are active immediately. You can edit
them later by selecting different locations from the lists in the Parameter section
(see Selecting source tube and destination tube from a list on p. 62).
63
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.3.8 Editing the pattern for a Transfer command
The following pattern types are available for Transfer commands:
• Standard pattern (only for Sample Transfer commands): A simple standard pattern which
Operation
can be based on rows or columns.
• Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection (for all commands except when using
module racks): a standard pattern which is not strictly based on rows or columns, e.g., for
pipetting a sample from the first column of a source tube plate 1:1 to the second column of a
destination tube plate. To define this pattern, you need to specify only the first few positions.
The pattern is then recognized and completed automatically.
• Irregular pattern (for some commands (see Reference list of commands and parameters on
p. 68)): irregular pattern for a plate or module rack in which the source tube and destination
tube locations can be defined freely. Automatic pattern detection is not possible, all locations
must be specified manually (see Creating an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 66).
To edit the pattern for a Transfer command proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to edit (e.g., a Sample
Transfer command) and define the source and destination tube labware (see Define the
source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer on p. 62).
2. If the Sample Transfer command requires a standard pattern either by rows or columns,
place a tick in the Standard checkbox and select the row-wise or column-wise option.
3. To define a regular pattern that is not row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button.
The Pattern window opens.
The source and destination tube labware is displayed. The source tube labware is displayed
on the left-hand side with a blue frame. The destination tube labware is displayed on the
right-hand side with a red frame.
4. If there is a previous pattern that you do not want to use, click on the New Pattern button to
remove it.
64
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5. In the source tube labware click on the first location from which liquid is to be aspirated (e.g.,
location 1A).
Operation
6. In the destination tube labware click on the location (or locations) to which the first liquid
volume is to be transferred (e.g., location 2A).
7. In the source tube labware click on the second location from which liquid is to be aspirated
(e.g., location 1B).
8. In the destination tube labware click on the location (or locations) to which the second liquid
volume is to be transferred (e.g., location 2B).
epBlue will attempt to recognize the intended pattern and will highlight the next position in
gray.
9. If the recognized pattern matches your requirements, click on OK to confirm and close the
Pattern window. The pattern will be completed automatically up to the defined number of
samples.
65
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
10. If you wish to discard the recognized pattern, click on New Pattern and start again.
11. To check a defined pattern, click on Show Process in the pattern window.
Operation
The pattern sequence is displayed and the corresponding source and destination locations
are displayed in the same color.
For a description of all available commands and their parameters, see the reference list of
commands (see Reference list of commands and parameters on p. 68).
Alternatively, you can create an irregular pattern for a plate or module rack (see Creating an
irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 66).
5.7.3.9 Creating an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack
An irregular pattern for a plate or module rack is a pattern in which the source and destination
tube locations can be defined freely. Automatic pattern detection is not possible, all positions
must be specified manually. Alternatively, you can define a standard pattern (row-wise or
column-wise) or a regular pattern with automatic pattern detection (see Editing the pattern for
a Transfer command on p. 64).
To create an irregular pattern for a plate, rack or module rack, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to edit (e.g., a Sample
Transfer command) and define the source and destination tube labware (see Define the
source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer on p. 62).
2. In the Parameter section in the Irregular Pattern checkbox under the list with the source and/or
destination tube labware place a tick as required.
3. Click on the Pattern button.
The Pattern window opens.
The source and destination tube labware is displayed. The source tube labware is displayed
on the left-hand side highlighted in blue. The destination tube labware is displayed on the
left-hand side highlighted in red.
66
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
4. In the source tube labware click on the first location from which liquid is to be aspirated.
Operation
5. In the destination tube labware click on the location to which the first liquid volume is to be
transferred.
6. Select all locations of the intended pattern in the same way, alternating between source tube
and destination tube labware.
7. To confirm the pattern and close the Pattern window, click on OK.
8. If you wish to discard the pattern, click on New Pattern and start again.
9. To check a defined pattern, click on Show Process in the pattern window.
The pattern sequence is displayed and the corresponding source and destination tube
locations are displayed in the same color.
For a description of all available commands and their parameters, see the reference list of
commands (see Reference list of commands and parameters on p. 68).
5.7.3.10 Checking the method or individual commands (parameter test)
The parameter test allows you to check whether all required parameters are set, either for the
entire method or for individual commands or a sequence of commands.
1. To check the parameter settings of the current method, click on the Check Method icon in the
toolbar of the Work (see p. 49) tab or select Edit - Check Method from the main menu.
2. To check an individual command or a sequence of commands, select the commands you
wish to check, right-click and select Check from the context menu, or select Edit - Check
Commands from the main menu.
A message window opens to inform you if a parameter error was found. Correct the error and
repeat the check until all errors have been corrected.
5.7.3.11 Importing commands from a CSV file
When working with biological material (e.g., protein solutions, nucleic acid solutions), it may be
necessary to transfer defined quantities of different samples from various parent solutions to a
target container in order to adjust the concentration (thus creating standards). The quantities of
sample material that must be transferred can be determined by physical measurements (e.g., by
using spectroscopic methods, enzymatic analysis, or chemical methods), and the resulting
quantities can then be listed in a table.
67
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
To import a table in CSV file format, select Edit - Import from CSV from the menu.
Operation
For details, please refer to the appendix (see Importing commands from a CSV file on
p. 216).
5.7.4
Reference list of commands and parameters
This reference list contains all available commands and their parameters and options. Further
details and specialized information can be found in the appendix.
You can use these commands to define a procedure (see Procedure tab - defining a procedure
on p. 57).
5.7.4.1 General configurations for Transfer commands
The following general parameters and options are used for Transfer commands. Click on the
Parameters, Options, Mix and Liquid Type tabs in the Parameters section to edit the command
parameters as required by your method.
Hint!
Some parameters may differ or may not be available for individual commands. In this case please
find additional details in the section about the corresponding Transfer command: Sample
Transfer (see p. 69), Reagent Transfer (see p. 70), Dilute (see p. 70), Pool (see p. 71) and
Pool One Destination (see p. 71).
Parameter
• Pipet. Tool / Filter Tips: select the dispensing tool you want to use from the list. If you are
using filter tips, activate the Filter Tips option.
• Volume: enter the volume to be transferred in each step. The volume is aspirated or
dispensed according to the transfer types specified below.
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: the volume set above is dispensed in each multidispense step.
– Multiaspirate: the volume set above is aspirated in each multiaspirate step.
• Source/Destination: select the source tube labware and destination tube labware from the
worktable allocation (see Define the source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination)
for a transfer on p. 62).
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing locations within this
command.
– Standard pattern: if the command requires a standard pattern that is either row-wise or
column-wise, check the Standard checkbox and select the row-wise or column-wise
option.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 64).
– Irregular pattern: to create an irregular pattern for a plate or a module rack, check the
Irregular Pattern checkbox below the list of source and/or destination tube labware as
required. Then click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern (see Creating
an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 66).
Options
• Aspirate from bottom: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from the bottom of the well.
• Elution from filter: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from a PCR Cleanup filter plate.
• Dispense from top: select if the liquid is to be dispensed from the top edge of the well.
• Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
Mix
• Mix before aspirating / Mix after dispensing: activate the relevant option if the liquid is to be
mixed before aspiration or after dispensing. To mix the liquid, it will be aspirated into the tip
and dispensed back into the same well.
68
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
No. of cycles: set the required number of mixing cycles.
Speed: set the mixing speed.
Volume: set the volume that is to be aspirated and dispensed during the mixing process.
Fixed height: activate this option if you wish to use fixed height positions for mixing, and set the
height values for aspiration and dispensing. The height is measured between the tip and the
bottom of the well.
Operation
•
•
•
•
This option should only be used with filling levels below the volume of the well. With greater
filling volumes, liquid can be forced out of the tube or well!
Liquid Type
• Standard Liquid Type: select the liquid type which most closely resembles the physical
properties of the liquid you want to transfer.
• Change Parameters: to change the settings for the selected liquid type for this command,
activate this option and set the values according to your requirements.
To restore the default settings for the selected liquid type, click the Set Default button.
5.7.4.2 Number of Samples
Use the Number of Samples command to specify how many samples are to be processed in the
subsequent steps of the procedure. It applies to all commands until the next Number of
Samples command in the procedure. The command can be used several times in a method to
change the number of samples during the sequence of the procedure.
Dependent on the type and purpose of the following commands, the Number of Samples
command has different effects:
• Sample Transfer: number of samples picked up by the source tube plate.
• Reagent Transfer: number of wells of the destination tube plate into which the reagent is
dispenses.
• Dilute: number of samples to be diluted.
• Pool and Pool One Destination: Number of wells in the source tube plate from which liquid is
aspirated.
• Mix: number of wells in the plate in which the liquid is mixed.
Parameter
• Fix Number of Samples / (Max) Number of Samples: to define a fixed number of samples for all
runs of this method, activate the Fix Number of Samples option and enter the required number.
The specified number of samples will then be used for all method runs.
To use a variable number of samples, deactivate the Fix Number of Samples option and enter
the maximum number of samples. The exact number of samples for each individual method
run must then be entered by the operator when the method starts.
• Comment: enter a comment, if required. The comment will be displayed at the start of the
method.
5.7.4.3 Sample Transfer
Use the Sample Transfer command to transfer samples from different locations of the source
tube labware to different locations of the destination tube labware. During the Sample Transfer
each sample is transferred in accordance with a defined pattern from its original well in the
source tube plate to a defined well in the destination tube plate.
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 68). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: the volume set above is dispensed in each multidispense step.
– Multiaspirate: not available.
69
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.4.4 Reagent Transfer
Operation
Use the Reagent Transfer command to transfer samples from a location in the source tube
labware to different locations in the destination tube labware. During the reagent transfer, the
reagent is taken from its tube or well in the source tube labware and dispensed into various
specified wells in the destination tube plate, according to the defined pattern.
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 68). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: the volume set above is dispensed in each multidispense step.
– Multiaspirate: not available.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing positions within this
command.
– Standard pattern: not available.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 64).
– Irregular pattern: to create an irregular pattern for a plate or a module rack, check the
Irregular Pattern checkbox below the list of source and/or destination tube labware as
required. Then click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern (see Creating
an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 66).
5.7.4.5 Dilute
The Dilute command is a modified Sample Transfer command making it easier to carry out
diluting series. A defined volume is transported from one well to the next several times by means
of pipetting.
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 68). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: not available.
– Multiaspirate: not available.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing locations within this
command.
– Standard pattern: not available.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 64).
– Irregular pattern: Only available for the source tube location. To create an irregular pattern
for a source tube plate or a module rack, check the Irregular Pattern checkbox below the
list of source and/or destination tube labware. Then click on the Pattern button and define
the intended pattern (see Creating an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 66).
Options
• Aspirate from bottom: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from the bottom of the well.
• Elution from filter: not applicable.
• Dispense from top: select if the liquid is to be dispensed from the top edge of the well.
• Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
70
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.4.6 Pool
Operation
The Pool command is used to transfer liquids from several source tube locations to a single
destination tube location. For example, the contents of several source tube labware wells can be
pooled in a new destination tube labware well.
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 68). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: not available.
– Multiaspirate: the volume set above is aspirated in each multiaspirate step.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing locations within this
command.
– Standard pattern: not available.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 64).
– Irregular pattern: not available.
Options
• Aspirate from bottom: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from the bottom of the well.
• Elution from filter: not applicable.
• Dispense from top: select if the liquid is to be dispensed from the top edge of the well.
• Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
5.7.4.7 Pool One destination
With the Pool One Destination command you can transfer liquid from several source tube
locations into a single destination tube location. This command is a simplified Pool
command.(see Pool on p. 71)
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 68). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: not available.
– Multiaspirate: the volume set above is aspirated in each multiaspirate step.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing locations within this
command.
– Standard pattern: not available.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 64).
– Irregular pattern: Only available for the source tube location. To create an irregular pattern
for a source tube plate or a module rack, check the Irregular Pattern checkbox below the
list of source and/or destination tube labware. Then click on the Pattern button and define
the intended pattern (see Creating an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 66).
71
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Options
• Aspirate from bottom: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from the bottom of the well.
Operation
• Elution from filter: not applicable.
• Dispense from top: select if the liquid is to be dispensed from the top edge of the well.
• Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
5.7.4.8 Mix
Use the Mix command to mix liquids at one location. To mix the liquid, it will be aspirated into the
tip and dispensed back into the same well.
Parameter
• No. of cycles: set the required number of mixing cycles.
• Speed: set the mixing speed.
• Tool / Filter Tips: select from the list the dispensing tool you want to use. If you are using filter
tips, activate the Filter Tips option.
• Mixing Volume: set the volume that is to be aspirated and dispensed during the mixing
process.
• Fixed height: activate this option if you wish to use fixed height positions for mixing, and set the
height values for aspiration and dispensing. The height is measured between the tip and the
bottom of the well.
This option should only be used with filling levels below the volume of the well. With greater
filling volumes, liquid can be forced out of the tube or well!
• Racks: select the labware from the worktable assignment.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify mixing positions within this command.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: click on the Pattern button and define the
intended pattern.
– Irregular pattern: To create an irregular pattern place a tick in the Irregular Pattern
checkbox under the Racks list. Then click on the Pattern button and define the intended
pattern.
Options
• Liquid Type: select the Liquid Type which most closely resembles the physical properties of the
liquid you want to mix.
• Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
5.7.4.9 Exchange (epMotion 5070)
The Exchange command is used to carry out a manual labware exchange between 2 worktable
locations. When the method runs on the epMotion 5070, the method run stops at the Exchange
command and the operator is requested to change the labware manually.
Parameter
• exchange Labware: select the first labware to be changed.
• with Labware: select the second labware.
5.7.4.10 Wait
The Wait command defined a definite pause before the next step. The procedure continues
automatically after the specified time has elapsed.
Parameter
• Wait Time: set the duration of the pause.
• Wait for Temperature / Location: activate this option if the epMotion 5070 CB should wait until
the target temperature at a location has been reached, and select the location from the list.
72
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.4.11 Comment
Use the Comment command to enter a comment line to be displayed at a specific location in the
Procedure.
Operation
• Comment: enter the text for the comment.
5.7.4.12 User Intervention
Use the User Intervention command to insert steps into your method which the user has to
execute manually. The procedure only continues after the operator has confirmed the display
message.
• Comment: enter an informative comment to tell the operator what task he or she needs to
carry out.
• Alarm: activate this option for an alerting signal when this step in the procedure is reached.
5.7.4.13 Temp Cycler (epMotion 5075 MC)
Only for epMotion 5075 MC. Use this command to select the temperature for the cycler lid and/or
for the cycler block before starting a cycler program.
• Lid Temperature On / Lid Temperature: activate this option to set a temperature for the
cycler lid and enter the temperature.
• Block Temperature On / Block Temperature: activate this option to set a temperature for
the cycler block and enter the temperature.
5.7.4.14 Start Cycler (epMotion 5075 MC)
Only for epMotion 5075 MC. Use this command to select a cycler program and specify the start.
The StartCycler command must always be the last command of a method.
• Cycler Program: select the cycler program.
73
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.5
The Run tab
With the Run tab you can start a method on one or several devices available in your system.
Operation
To go to the Run tab select the Work tab on the left-hand side of the program window and select
the Run tab.
The Run tab is divided into 2 sections.
74
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
The Options section (section 1) is displayed in the top part of the Run tab. It guides you through
the starting process step by step and allows you to enter additional parameters and select the
required options for the method run.
Operation
The Worktable (section 2) is displayed in the bottom part of the Run tab. It shows the worktable
assignment for the active method and allows you to check the labware for the method. You
cannot edit the worktable here; To do so you need to change to the Worktable tab (see Worktable
tab - equip the worktable on p. 53).
To start a method, proceed as follows.
1. Open the method (see Opening an application on p. 38).
2. Change to the Run tab or, while the Worktable or Procedure tabs are active, click on the Start
Method icon.
The Options section in the Run tab displays a list of devices in your system. To display only
devices which are currently available and suitable for the selected method, activate the Filter
Devicelist option.
3. Select the device you want to use and click on Run.
If the number of samples is defined as variable for any step in the procedure, a window opens
in which the actual number of samples for the current run of the method must be entered
manually. The number of samples request does not appear in methods with a fixed number of
samples.
4. Enter the number of samples and click on OK. If required, enter the number of samples for
further commands in the same way.
5. Check the supply of the worktable of the device and make sure that it matches the worktable
assignment defined for the method (as displayed in the Worktable section of the Run tab).
6. To edit labware-specific settings for level sensor and volumes, double-click on the labware in
the Worktable section.
75
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
The Labware Settings window opens.
7. Change the settings as required, and click on OK. Edit the settings for other labware in the
same way, if required.
8. Under Level Sensor Settings in the Options section define the level sensor settings for this
method run.
The following options are available:
• Levels: check the liquid levels according to the settings defined for the individual labware
items.
• Tips: check the type and quantity of tips in the tip rack.
• Locations: check that the labware is positioned correctly on the worktable, as specified in
the method.
The options you select here only apply to this particular method run. To define the general
level sensor settings use the function Optical Sensor in Functions tab (see Optical sensor on
p. 95).
76
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
9. If liquid detection is switched off for the method or for individual labware components, the next
steps display the labware information for each component, where the volume settings must
be entered manually.
Operation
10. Enter the current volume and click on Run. If required, enter the volumes for other labware in
the same way.
The method starts and the display changes to the Control tab(see The Control tab on p. 80).
5.7.5.1 Simulation
Before you start your method, you have the ability to simulate the process.
To simulate a method, proceed as follows.
1. Open the method (see Opening an application on p. 38).
2. Change to the Run tab or click with the tabs Worktable or Procedure active on the Start Method
icon.
The Options section in the Run tab displays a list of devices in your system. To display only
devices which are currently available and suitable for the selected method, activate the Filter
Devicelist option.
77
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
3. Select the device you want to use, click on Simulation and click on Run.
Operation
If the number of samples is defined as variable for any step in the procedure, a window opens
in which the actual number of samples for the current simulation of the method must be
entered manually. The number of samples request does not appear in methods with a fixed
number of samples.
4. Enter the number of samples and click on OK. If required, enter the number of samples for
further commands in the same way.
5. Specify the level sensor settings for the simulation. Click on Apply when you change the
settings or click on Close when you don´t change the settings.
The simulation starts in the Simulation tab.
Hint!
Only one simulation can start per client. To start a new simulation you have to close the last
simulation first. To exit epBlue the simulation must be close.
Controlling the simulation
If you start a simulation, the Simulation tab opens.
The Control icons allow you to control the simulation. The following options are available.
You can vary the speed of the simulation from real time (Value 1) to ten fold faster
by moving the speed needle with the mouse.
Start: to continue the simulation. The simulation will resume until the end, or until
you stop it again
Steps: to carry out the simulation step by step. The simulation will perform the
next step or action, and will then stop again.
Stop: to interrupt the simulation. The simulation will stop at the current step or
action and wait for further instructions. The other Control icons become active.
78
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Abort: to abort the simulation.
Operation
Exit: to exit the simulation. The Simulation tab is closed. Now you can start another
simulation or exit epBlue.
5.7.5.2 Debug log
Hint!
The debug log can only be recorded by the administrator and is required only if the Eppendorf
Service team needs more information in the event of any faults occurring.
As administrator, you also have the option at the start of a method of recording a debug log for
this method run. The debug log records detailed information about the method run in question.
1. Before starting the method, click on the Debug Log checkbox.
The checkbox then contains a tick.
2. Then start the method as usual.
Recording the debug log can cause the method run to proceed more slowly.
3. The debug log can be viewed and printed out from the Logs tab.
79
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.7.6
The Control tab
In the Control tab you can monitor and control the devices on which your methods are currently
running.
Operation
epBlue automatically changes to the Control tab if you have started a method via the Run tab
(see The Run tab on p. 74).
The Control tab is divided into 3 sections.
80
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
The Worktable section (section 1) is displayed in the top part of the Control tab. While the method
is running, it shows the status of the worktable at the current step in the procedure.
Operation
The Procedure Progress section (section 2) is displayed in the center of the Control tab. It
highlights the current step in the procedure and displays some information on the command that
is being carried out. The Control icons on the left-hand side allow you to pause, to carry out the
method step by step, or to abort the run.
The Logfile section (section 3) displays the logfile which records every step in the procedure and
provides detailed information on the current status of the run.
5.7.6.1 Controlling the method run
Whilst the method is running the current command is highlighted in the Procedure Progress
section.
The Control icons allow you to control the method run. The following options are available.
Stop: to stop the method run. The device will stop at the current step or action and
wait for further instructions. The other Control icons become active.
Steps: to carry out the method step by step. The device will perform the next step
or action in the method, and will then stop again.
Start: to continue the method run. The device will resume the method run until the
end, or until you stop it again.
Abort: to abort the method run. The device will abort the method run and return to
its initial state.
5.7.6.2 Reading logfiles
A logfile is generated automatically when a method is started. The logfile precisely records every
step of the process.
You can view and print the logfiles and the method description (see Printing applications and
logfiles on p. 51).
Example: Extract from a logfile - Sample Transfer
13 11:07:53 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
top\dws\plates/PCR96\EP_TT_PCR_150
14 11:07:53 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
FILTER96\EP_Cleanup_FP
15 11:07:53 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
16 11:07:53 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
17 11:07:53 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
18 11:07:53 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
19 11:08:23 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
20 11:08:49 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
21 11:09:16 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
22 11:09:43 2 SampleTransfer 0x0000
SRC-ID = 3 Name = PCR96TwinTec Labware = ./
DES-ID = 6 Name = FILTER96 Labware = ./top\dws\plates/
Samples= 96 Replicates= 1
Tool = ./top\dws\tools/TM_300_8
Liquid = ./top\dws\liquids/water
Volume = 50 Transfer type=pip Change tips=bafn
SMP 1.1 SRC 3.0 VOL 60 DES 6.0 VOL 0
SMP 9.1 SRC 3.1 VOL 60 DES 6.1 VOL 0
SMP 17.1 SRC 3.2 VOL 60 DES 6.2 VOL 0
SMP 25.1 SRC 3.3 VOL 60 DES 6.3 VOL 0
81
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Operation
5
5.8
The Labware tab
5.8.1
Overview of the Labware tab
Hint!
This tab is only displayed if you are logged in as a member of a user group with the necessary
user rights.
If the Labware tab is empty when opened, you first have to open the labware via the Home tab
(see The Home tab on p. 35) or the file window (see The file window on p. 37).
epBlue automatically changes to the Labware tab if you have opened labware via the Home tab or
the file window. You can access the empty Labware tab also through a mouse click. With the
Labware tab you can compile labware for use in yours system and, provided you have the
necessary access rights, can create and edit your own labware combinations.
Generally the Labware tab contains the following two editing modes.
If you edit a Rack and tube combination or a Module rack and tube combination the Labware
tab displays lists with the available racks, module racks and tubes from which you can select the
labware components.
82
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
If you fill a Reservoir rack the Labware tab displays the reservoir rack and you can move different
reservoirs and filled module racks into the rack via Drag-and-Drop.
Operation
5.8.1.1 List of open labware
On the left-hand side of the Labware tab a list with all open labware is displayed. Several labware
items can be open at the same time and can be edited in parallel. The current labware is
highlighted in darker blue. To switch between the items, click on the labware names in the list.
83
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.8.1.2 Icons in the Labware tab
Operation
In the Labware tab the following icons are available in the toolbar under the main menu.
•
•
•
•
•
New... New Application: to create a new application for editing
Open... Open Application / Open Labware: to open an existing application or labware
Save: to save changes to applications or labware
Print: to print a report
Logout: to log out of your user account and exit the software
Alternatively, these functions are also available in the File menu.
5.8.2
Activate or deactivate labware
You can activate or deactivate labware for use in your system. If you edit applications, only the
active labware is displayed in the Worktable tab (see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on
p. 53). Deactivated labware will not be displayed and cannot be used in applications. You can
reactivate deactivated labware at any time.
Hint!
Before you deactivate labware, make sure that it is not used in any applications. Applications
using labware which is not active will not run in your system.
To activate or deactivate labware for use in your system, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. Select a labware folder on the left-hand side of the Folder list.
If there are subfolders, these are displayed in the Subfolder list.
3. If required, select a subfolder.
The labware in this folder is displayed in the Labware list.
A checked checkbox next to the labware indicates that this labware is active and can be used
in applications.
4. To view additional information on a labware item, select the required labware and click on Info
in the Labware Properties section.
5. Activate or deactivate the labware items as required by clicking the checkboxes.
6. Close the Labware file window.
The labware you marked as active will be available for use in applications.
You can change these settings again at any time.
84
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5.8.3
5
Adjusting the labware bottom tolerance
Bottom tolerance can be adjusted only for some labware types, such as plates, tubes and tubs.
You can identify editable labware in the file window easily by clicking on it: if the Edit Labware icon
is active, you can edit the bottom tolerance for this labware.
Operation
Hint!
Bottom tolerance describes the distance between the calculated bottom of the tube and the
calculated lowest part of the pipette tip. The default setting for bottom tolerance for the majority of
tubes is 1 mm. For some reservoirs, it is 2.5 mm.
A reduction in bottom tolerance leads to a lower remaining volume and should only be used with
expensive reagents. Reduced bottom tolerance should be examined again when changing batch
of pipette tips, plates or tubes or if there is doubt about dispensing being correct.
In the case of special tasks, for example removing liquids from above a pellet, it is recommended
that the factory-set bottom tolerance should be increased. The user has sole responsibility for the
correctness of dispensing and for straightforward aspiration in the case of tubes with altered
bottom tolerance.
Adjusting the bottom tolerance for labware is at your own risk.
Hint!
To adjust bottom tolerance for labware, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. Select a labware folder on the left-hand side of the Folder list.
If there are subfolders, these are displayed in the Subfolder list.
3. If required, select a subfolder.
The labware in this folder is displayed in the Labware list.
4. In the Labware list select the labware for which you want to modify the bottom tolerance.
The properties of the selected labware are displayed on the right-hand side.
5. To edit the selected labware, click on Edit properties.
85
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
A dialog window appears.
6. Enter the required value in the Bottom Tol. field.
The remaining volume is displayed below. The minimum bottom tolerance is 200 µm.
7. Click on Save to save the new setting.
The new settings are saved. If the original labware file is read-only (Eppendorf Standard
Labware), a copy of the original labware file is created automatically and is saved with the
new settings. Copies are numbered consecutively.
A reduced bottom tolerance should be approved for use only following the appropriate test
runs. With the 30 mL and 100 mL reservoirs in particular, the reservoir must not be lifted by
the pipette tips during aspiration as a result of a reduction in bottom tolerance.
When calculating the Remaining Volume, the minimum immersion depth of 0.7 mm for the
pipette tip in the liquid is included in addition to bottom tolerance. With the 30 mL and 100 mL
reservoirs, volume information is not absolutely accurate in the case of reduced bottom
tolerance (because of the serrated bottom).
In the case of less stable plates it should be noted that the plate could be slightly bent. It is
therefore not recommended to reduce bottom tolerance with such plates.
5.8.4
Filling racks and module racks with tubes
You can create your own labware combinations from existing components, e.g., new
rack-and-tube or module-rack-and-tube combinations. The module racks you equip here can
then be combined with various reservoirs to create your own customized reservoir racks (see Fill
reservoir rack with reservoirs and filled module racks on p. 90).
To equip a rack or module rack with tubes, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
86
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
2. In the left-hand side of the Folder list and in the Subfolder list select the folder Equip Racks +
Modules with Tubes.
Operation
The existing labware combinations in this folder are displayed in the Labware list.
The properties of the selected folder are displayed on the right-hand side.
3. To create a new labware combination, e.g., to equip a module rack with tubes, click on New
Labware.
A dialog window opens.
4. Enter a name for the new labware. If required, enter a short description of the combination in
the Comment field.<Emphasis/>
5. Click on Create.
The new labware combination has been created and is displayed in the Labware list.
The new labware is opened and displayed in the Labware tab.
87
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
The Racks list on the left-hand side displays the available racks and module racks. The Tubes
list in the center displays the available tubes with which you can equip the racks and module
racks.
6. In the Racks list select a rack or module rack. In the Tubes list select the appropriate tubes.
If you make a selection in the Racks or Tubes lists, the lists are filtered so that only the
components are displayed which can be used in combination with the selected object.
88
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
The selected items are displayed as graphics below the list. The Product Info field on the
right shows additional information on the selected labware.
Operation
7. To reset both lists and make a new selection, click on Reset Racks and Tubes Lists on the
right-hand side.
8. When you have selected a rack or module rack and the suitable tubes, click on Save.
The labware combination is saved.
9. To save the combination under a different name, right-click on the labware in the list on the
left-hand side of the Labware tab and select Save As from the context menu.
A dialog opens.
89
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
10. Enter a new name for the labware combination and click on Save.
The labware is saved under a new name and displayed in the Labware tab for subsequent
editing.
Operation
11. Create and edit other required labware combinations in the same way.
The module racks you have equipped here can now be used to create your own customized
reservoir racks (see p. 90).
5.8.5
Fill reservoir rack with reservoirs and filled module racks
You can create your own customized reservoir racks by equipping a rack or holder with various
reservoirs or equipped module racks. If you have previously defined your own
module-rack-and-tube combinations (see Filling racks and module racks with tubes on p. 86),
you can now use those equipped module racks in a reservoir rack.
To equip a reservoir rack with reservoirs or equipped module racks, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 37).
2. In the left-hand side of the Folder list and in the Subfolder list select the folder Equip Holder with
Tubes + Modules.
The existing labware combinations in this folder are displayed in the Labware list.
The properties of the selected folder are displayed on the right-hand side.
3. To create a new labware combination, e.g., a new holder or reservoir rack, click on New
Labware.
A dialog window opens.
4. Enter a name for the new labware. If required, enter a short description of the combination in
the Comment field.<Emphasis/>
90
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5. Click on Create.
The new labware combination has been created and is displayed in the Labware list.
Operation
The new labware is opened and displayed in the Labware tab.
The list on the left shows the available reservoirs and the equipped module racks which you
can use to equip the reservoir rack.
91
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
Hint!
While you are dragging the reservoir or equipped module rack, it is attached to the mouse pointer
by its upper left-hand corner. To position it in the reservoir rack, direct the mouse pointer (not the
center of the reservoir or module rack icon) to the intended location.
6. Select a reservoir or equipped module rack from the list, drag it with the mouse to its intended
location in the reservoir rack and drop it there by releasing the mouse button.
The reservoir or equipped module rack is displayed in the reservoir rack.
The fields in the lower part of the Labware tab show additional information on the labware
selected above.
7. To replace an item in the reservoir rack with a different reservoir or equipped module rack,
simply drag the new item to the intended location. The old item is removed automatically.
8. When you have equipped the reservoir rack, click on Save.
The combination is saved.
9. To save the combination under a different name, right-click on the labware in the list on the
left-hand side of the Labware tab and select Save As from the context menu.
10. Enter a new name for the labware combination and click on Save.
The labware is saved under a new name and displayed in the Labware tab for subsequent
editing.
11. Create and edit other required reservoir racks and module racks in the same way.
92
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5.8.6
5
Download additional labware
Operation
In addition to the labware delivered with the system, more than 350 labware definitions are
available for download in the VIP section at www.epMotion.com. To log in to the VIP section, a
valid registration is required.
To download additional labware, proceed as follows.
1. Log in to the VIP section at www.epMotion.com.
2. In the Labware section, use the search criteria to find suitable labware. To add the labware to
the selection, click on Add.
3. Download the labware files in your selection. For each labware definition, you will receive a
zip-compressed file. Save these files in a temporary directory on your hard disk or on a USB
storage device.
4. To import the labware definitions into epBlue, log in to epBlue as an administrator.
5. Select Tools - Labware Update from the main menu.
The labware update window opens.
6. Under Labware Update Archive(s), select the downloaded zip files from your hard disk or USB
storage device.
7. Activate or deactivate the update options as required.
The following options are available:
• Overwrite existing Eppendorf Standard Labware: activate this option to overwrite
Eppendorf Standard Labware during update; deactivate this option to leave Eppendorf
Standard Labware unchanged.
• Ask before overwriting Files: activate this option to confirm before overwriting existing
files; deactivate this option to overwrite existing files without confirmation.
• Remove all User Labware Files: activate this option to remove all labware files defined by
the users in your system; deactivate this option to keep any labware files defined by users.
93
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
8. Click on Start Update.
Operation
The labware files are imported into epBlue, and a confirmation message appears.
After the labware update has finished, you can delete the downloaded zip files from your hard
disk or USB storage device.
5.9
The Functions tab
5.9.1
Overview of the Functions tab
Hint!
This tab is only displayed if you are logged in as a member of a user group with the necessary
user rights.
The Functions tab contains some general functions for configuring the system.
5.9.1.1 List of available devices
On the left-hand side of the Functions tab a list with all available devices is displayed. The current
device is highlighted in darker blue. To switch between the devices, click on the device names in
the list.
5.9.1.2 Two tabs for configuring devices
There are two further tabs within the Functions tab:
Properties: The Properties tab displays a component list and specifies its respective firmware,
proxy and server versions.
Settings: The Settings tab displays general information and you can execute service functions
through it as described in the following sections.
94
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
5.9.2
Optical sensor
Use this function to set the general level sensor settings.
To do so, proceed as follows.
1. Select the function Optical Sensor in the Settings list.
The current settings are displayed on the right.
The following options are available:
• Levels: check the liquid levels according to the settings defined for the individual labware
items.
• Tips: check the type and quantity of tips in the tip rack.
• Locations: check that the labware is positioned correctly on the worktable, as specified in
the method.
2. Activate or deactivate the options as required, and click on Apply.
The new level sensor settings are active.
95
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.9.3
Tool interlock
Operation
To unlock the tool in case of a system error. This function allows you to control the locking
mechanism of the carrier which locks the dispensing tool in position when it is taken up by the
carrier.
To control the tool interlock, proceed as follows.
1. In the Settings list select the function Tool interlock.
The current settings are displayed on the right.
The State section displays the current lock status.
• Zero value sensor: shows the status of the sensor which checks that the tool is in zero
position.
• Tool detection sensor: shows the status of the sensor which identifies the tool in the
carrier.
• Interlock: shows the current status of the tool interlock.
• Current Tool: if there is a tool in the carrier, it is identified and displayed here.
Hint!
While you operate the locking mechanism, hold the tool firmly in position with one hand.
Otherwise it will drop out of the locking mechanism and be damaged.
2. Click on Lock or Unlock to lock or unlock the tool.
5.9.4
Firmware Update
With this function you can execute a Firmware Update.
1. In the Settings list select the function Firmware Update.
2. Under Flashfile, specify the location of the new firmware file.
3. Click on Flash.
The firmware update is carried out. The progress is shown under State.
4. When the firmware update is complete, exit the client and the server software. Then restart
first the server, then the client software.
96
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5.9.5
5
Dosing device
Use this function to check the strokes of the dosing device for maintenance and calibration
purposes.
Operation
Insert a tool and lock it with the Tool interlock function.
• Tool used: Name of the tool.
• Tool path: File path of the tool specification file.
• Strokes: Strokes of this dosing device.
Don't forget to remove the tool:
Hint!
1. Hold the tool with one hand.
2. Unlock the tool carrier with the Tool interlock function.
5.10
The Admin tab
5.10.1
Logging in as administrator
Loss of data due to misuse or loss of the administrator password.
NOTICE!
The administrator password protects the system against unauthorized access to the configuration
and the stored data of all users.
Make a note of the administrator password and keep it in a safe place. If you lose the
administrator password, contact Eppendorf Service.
Provide the administrator password only to persons who are permitted to edit the
configuration of the system and who have the necessary skills to do this.
Hint!
In order to prevent unauthorized access to the system, it is strongly recommended that you
change the default administrator password as soon as possible (see The Admin tab on p. 97).
It is recommended that you create individual user accounts for every operator who will use the
epMotion 5070 CB (see Creating the first user account on p. 29).
To log in as administrator, proceed as follows.
1. To start epBlue, double-click on the Eppendorf epBlue icon on the desktop, or select Start Programs - Eppendorf - epBlue in the Windows Start menu.
97
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
The login screen appears.
2. Enter the account name "administrator" and the administrator password (the default is
"admin"), and click on Login.
epBlue starts and the program window displays the Home (see Overview of the Home tab on
p. 35) tab. You are logged in as administrator.
3. Select the Admin tab on the left-hand side of the program window.
5.10.2
Overview of the Admin tab
The Admin tab is only displayed if you are logged in as administrator. It allows you, as
administrator, to manage user accounts and groups.
In the left-hand column of the Admin tab you can change between Account, Group and Extra.
The current selection is highlighted in darker blue.
5.10.2.1 Account
When Account is selected in the left-hand column of the Admin tab, there are two tabs for editing
user accounts:
• Account Overview: shows a list of all user accounts and gives you some information about
every user (see p. 101).
• Edit Account: allows you to create new user accounts or edit existing accounts (see p. 102).
5.10.2.2 Group
When Group is selected in the left-hand column of the Admin tab, there are two tabs for editing
user groups:
• Group Overview: shows a list of all user groups and displays the user rights defined for every
group (see p. 107).
• Edit Group: allows you to create new user groups and specify their user rights (see p. 108).
98
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.10.2.3 Extra
Malfunctions when connecting additional clients.
Operation
NOTICE!
Use only software approved and tested by Eppendorf AG.
If you connect an additional client (e.g., PC or laptop) yourself and reconfigure the system,
you take sole responsibility for this.
Only install and configure an extra client if you have adequate experience of the relevant
network and system configuration tasks.
Integrate and configure an additional client into a cooperation network, only let an IT
specialist do it who can also take over Support.
Before installation, you should perform a data backup on the prospective client.
Eppendorf AG expressly accepts no warranty for epBlue software functioning on the client
together with other programs selected by the licensee.
Eppendorf AG likewise accepts no liability for any damages or consequential damages (such
as loss of profit, interrupted operations, loss of information or data) which may occur. This
does not apply where compulsory liability is prescribed by law, in accordance with product
liability law for example, in cases of intent, gross negligence, where there is loss of life, injury
or impairment to health or if substantial contractual obligations are breached.
Eppendorf AG does not give any support for any additional clients configured on the industry
PC.
When Extra is selected in the left-hand column of the Admin tab, the Network and SMTP tabs are
available:
Network - connect a second client
If you have selected Extra in the left-hand column of the Admin tab you can establish a
point-to-point Ethernet connection to a second client. To this end, the client software (epBlue) is
installed on the second computer with no server (see booklet). The client must be connected to
the server computer (integrated industrial PC) by an Ethernet crossover cable. To enable the
second client to have access to the server, the second network connection of the server PC must
have an IP address assigned to it:
The network interface card of the second client needs the IP address of the server to get access:
1. Select the Network tab in the Extra tab of the Admin section of the server PC.
2. Select the field on the left, Local Area Connection 2.
3. Enter an IP address on the right.
The IP address should be 192.168.XXX.YYY. Do not use "20" or "020" for the numbers
"XXX". This must not be the same as the IP address for the Local Area Connection or another
IP address, which is already assigned to a device. The Local Area Connection is the
connection to the device. By default, the server's IP address is 192.168.20.1, the device's IP
address 192.168.20.2.
99
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
4. Adopt the IP address by clicking on Apply.
Operation
When the second client starts up, select the IP address quoted for the second network
connection at Server in the login window. The second client now has access to the data of the
server on the other computer.
SMTP
To carry out the SMTP settings you need to be familiar with network settings.
Hint!
The SMTP form allows you to send messages, including error messages, via e-mail. If you
activate the Send (see Create new user account on p. 102) checkbox in the Account settings, all
messages will be sent to the specified e-mail address. This function can be individually set for
each user. To be able to use this function, the outbox server (SMTP server) has to be defined in
the SMTP form. It is not necessary to define an inbox.
In the Account List on the left-hand side you will see all the accounts with the activated Send
checkbox.
To carry out the SMTP server settings
1. Activate the Configuring SMTP Server checkbox.
2. Choose your Authorization Type.
3. Enter the address of your SMTP server.
4. Choose your Port,
5. Enter your SMTP account for the device or a user account (SMTP Username, SMTP Password
and Email Sender), which will later be the sender account.
– The Email Header ´from´ and Email Header `Sender´ fields are automatically filled with the
e-mail address of the Email Sender. You also have the option to change them.
– The Email Header ´Subject´ and Email Text (Template) fields are filled with template data.
You also have the option to change them.
6. To confirm your settings, press Apply.
7. Deactivate the Configuring SMTP Server checkbox.
Your SMTP settings are now active for all Accounts with the Send function.
100
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
8. Select a User Account from the Account List.
Operation
The e-mail address from the Account settings is shown as the Email Receiver and automatically
inserted in the Email Header `to` field. You also have the option to change the e-mail address and
the contents of the e-mail header independently of each other.
To confirm your settings, press Apply. Click on the Test button to check the data. A message
appears. If the test failed, check the data and input the correct information.
If the transmission of a message has failed, a red envelop will appear on the right-hand side of
the screen.
5.10.3
Account Overview
The Account Overview tab in the Admin tab provides an overview of all user accounts registered in
your system.
The overview contains the following information.
• Personal Info: the user's full name and contact information.
• Profile Info: the user's home directory, the date of registration of the user account and, if
applicable, its expiry date.
• Groups: the user groups to which the user belongs. The user inherits the user rights defined
for the selected group or groups.
To create or edit user accounts, go to the Edit Account tab.
101
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.10.4
Edit accounts
The Edit Account tab in the Admin tab provides functions for creating new or editing existing
accounts. The Account List on the left-hand side displays the user accounts in your system.
Operation
You can create new user accounts (see p. 102), edit existing accounts (see p. 103), delete
accounts (see p. 104), and change the password for an account (see p. 105).
5.10.4.1 Create new user account
To create a new user account, proceed as follows.
1. Select Account in the left-hand area of the Admin tab to highlight it in dark blue and then
select the Edit Account tab.
2. Click on New Account.
The following form is displayed.
3. In the Account field, enter an account name for the new user.
4. In the Password and Confirm password fields, enter the password for the new user account. If
the entries in the two fields do not match exactly, a message will be displayed. In this case,
delete the contents of both fields and enter the password again.
5. In the Member of section, activate the user group to which you want the new user to belong.
The user will have the user rights defined for the selected group.
102
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
6. If you want the user account to be active only until a certain date, deactivate the never option
in the Password expires section, and set an expiry date.
Operation
This will create a temporary account which automatically expires on the specified date. You
can reactivate an expired account later by editing the account (see Editing a user account on
p. 103).
7. If you wish, you can enter further information about the new user, e.g., the user's name and
contact information. This information is optional. If you enter the name of the user he or she
will be addressed by this name in the Home tab after login. Otherwise the account name will
appear.
8. If you want to send error messages via e-mail, activate the Send checkbox.
9. Click on Submit.
The new user account is created. The user name appears in the Account List in the
Edit Account tab.
10. If required, create further user accounts in the same way.
11. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.10.4.2 Editing a user account
To edit an existing user account, proceed as follows.
1. Select the Edit Account tab in the Admin tab.
2. In the Account List on the left-hand side, select the user you want to edit.
3. Click on Edit Account.
103
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
The user account settings are displayed.
4. In the Member of section, activate the user group to which you want the user to belong. The
user will have the user rights defined for the selected group.
5. If you want the user account to be active only until a certain date, deactivate the never option
in the Password expires section, and set an expiry date.
The account will automatically expire on the specified date. You can reactivate an expired
account later by editing the account again.
6. If you wish, you can enter further information about the new user, e.g., the user's name and
contact information. This information is optional. If you enter the name of the user he or she
will be addressed by this name in the Home tab after login. Otherwise the account name will
appear.
7. If you want to send error messages via e-mail, activate the Send checkbox.
8. Click on Submit.
The changed settings for this user account are now active.
9. If required, edit other user accounts in the same way.
10. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.10.4.3 Deleting a user account
To delete a user account, proceed as follows.
1. Select the Edit Account tab in the Admin tab.
2. In the Account List on the left-hand side, select the user you want to delete.
3. Click on Remove Account.
104
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
The user account settings are displayed.
Operation
4. Click on Remove.
A message appears.
5. To keep the account, click on No.
6. To delete the account, click on Yes.
The account is deleted.
7. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.10.4.4 Change password
Hint!
Every user can change his or her own password at any time by selecting Tools - Account Change Password from the main menu.
If a user has lost his or her password, the administrator can change the user's password, e.g.,
reset it to a standard password. In this case, the user should then change the standard password
to a personal password as soon as possible to prevent unauthorized access to the system.
To change the password for a user account, proceed as follows.
1. Select the Edit Account tab in the Admin tab.
2. In the Account List on the left-hand side, select the user whose password you want to
change.
3. Click on Change Password.
105
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
The following form is displayed.
4. In the Password field, enter the current password.
5. In the New Password and Confirm password fields, enter the new password. If the entries
in the two fields do not match exactly, a message will be displayed. In this case, delete the
contents of both fields and enter the new password again.
6. Click on Submit.
The new password for this user account is now active.
7. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.10.5
Set up a new password
If a user has lost the password, the administrator can change the user's password.
To set a new password for a user account, proceed as follows
1. In the Admin tab select the Account item and go to the Edit tab.
2. In the Account List select the user whose password has been forgotten on the left-hand side.
3. Click on Set a new password.
106
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
The following form is displayed.
Operation
4. Enter the new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields.
If the entries in the fields do not match exactly, a message is displayed. In this case, delete
the contents of both fields and enter the new password again.
5. Click on Submit.
The new password for the selected user account is active.
6. Log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the system.
5.10.6
Group overview
The Group Overview tab in the Admin tab displays a list of all user groups and the access rights
defined for each group.
107
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
The overview contains the following information.
Operation
• Group: each group is displayed in a separate table column.
• Fixed: this checkbox is set for all groups because the user groups cannot be modified.
• System, Application, Labware etc.: the available user rights are listed. The rights that are
active for a user group are marked with an X in the respective table cell.
The following user groups are available. For exact details of user groups and access rights in
your system, please check the group overview for your system.
• Service: members of the Service group have access to all service functions. They are also
authorized to configure the system, install hardware and software, save and restore data,
manage accounts and labware, edit and run applications and print applications and logfiles.
• Administrator: members of the Administrator group can manage user accounts and user
groups and have access to some service functions. They are authorized to configure the
system, install hardware and software, save and restore data, manage labware, edit and run
applications and print applications and logfiles.
• User Level 2: members of the User Level 2 group are able to edit and run applications,
compile and modify labware which has been activated by an administrator or service
employees, and print applications and logfiles. Additionally, they can access some service
functions.
• User Level 1: members of the User Level 1 group are able to edit and run applications and
print applications and logfiles.
• Guest: members of the Guest group are able to run applications and print applications and
logfiles.
To create user groups, or to edit the user groups which you have created yourself, change to the
Edit Group tab.
5.10.7
Creating and editing user groups
Using the Edit Group tab in the Admin tab you can create new user groups and define the access
rights for all users within the group. The Group List on the left-hand side displays the user groups
in your system.
Hint!
You can edit only the user groups which you have created yourself. The Eppendorf standard user
groups cannot be edited.
To create a new user group, proceed as follows.
1. In the left-hand area of the Admin tab select the Group entry so that it is highlighted in darker
blue, and then select the Edit Group tab.
2. Click on New Group.
108
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
The following form is displayed.
Operation
3. In the Group Name field, enter a name for the new group.
4. In the Rule List section, click on the plus symbols next to the categories (such as System,
Application, Labware etc.) to display the user rights available in each category. Check the
checkboxes to activate the required user rights for users of the new group.
5. If you wish, you can enter a short description of the user group in the Description section.
6. Click on Submit.
The new user group is created. The group appears in the Group List in the Edit Group tab.
To add users to the new group, you can either create new user accounts (see Create new
user account on p. 102) or edit existing user accounts (see Editing a user account on p. 103).
7. To edit the access rights for a group you have created, select it in the Group List in the
Edit Group tab and click on Edit Group. The properties of the group are displayed. Activate or
deactivate the user rights as required, and click on Submit. The changes are active
immediately.
8. To delete a group you have created, select it in the Group List in the Edit Group tab and click
on Remove Group. The properties of the group are displayed. Click on Remove, and confirm
the warning message with Yes to delete the group.
9. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
109
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
5.10.8
Starting data backup and restoring data
Operation
Data loss due to lack of data backup or incorrect storage of data carriers.
NOTICE!
epBlue saves all information on user accounts, applications, labware and logfiles in a database
on the epMotion PC. Damage to this database (e.g., due to a hardware fault) causes this
information to be lost.
Carry out regular database backups via the function Backup in Admin tab.
Save the backup file on a secure data carrier and store it in accordance with the manufacturer
instructions.
Eppendorf is not liable for data loss and its consequences.
If you are logged in as Administrator or User Level 2, you can start data backup to save
applications, labware definitions and system data in a zip compressed archive. It is
recommended to carry out data backup on a regular basis. As Administrator, you can also restore
data from a previous backup.
To start data backup, proceed as follows.
1. Select Tools - Backup from the menu.
The Backup window opens.
110
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
2. In the Select Backup Data section, activate the checkboxes to specify the data you want to
save.
The following options are available:
Operation
• Eppendorf Standard Applications: save all default applications delivered and installed with
the software.
• User Applications: saves all applications created by yourself and other users working with
your system. No user account data will be saved (see "System Data, Configurations and
Protocols").
• Eppendorf Labware: saves all default labware specification files delivered and installed
with the software.
• User Labware: saves all labware combinations created by yourself and other users
working with your system.
• System Data, Device Configurations, User Accounts and Protocols: saves important
system data, information on the configuration of all devices connected to your system, and
protocol files documenting your applications and program runs.
3. In the Backup Destination Folder field, enter the path and directory where you want the
zip-compressed archive file to be saved, or click on the button on the right to select the
directory.
4. Click on Start Backup.
Backup of the selected data is carried out. The progress bar shows the current status of the
backup process.
When backup is finished, a message appears.
5. Click on OK to return to the Backup window, and click on Cancel to close the Backup window.
The data backup has been completed.
Hint!
Restoring data will not only restore Eppendorf standard data, but - depending on the options you
select - may also overwrite the data created by users in your system, such as user applications or
customized labware combinations.
Before you restore data from a previous backup, it is strongly recommended to backup all current
user applications and labware, so that you can restore them if required.
6. To restore data from a backup archive, select Tools - Restore from the menu.
111
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
Operation
The Restore window opens.
7. In the Select Data to Restore section, activate the checkboxes to specify the data you want to
restore from the archive.
8. In the Backup File field, enter the path and name of the zip-compressed archive that contains
the data you want to restore, or click on the button on the right to select the file from its
directory.
9. Click on Start Restore.
The selected data is restored. The progress bar shows the current status of the restore
process.
When the process is finished, a message appears.
10. Click on OK to return to the Restore window, and click on Cancel to close the Restore window.
The data has been restored.
After restoring the System Data, Device Configurations and Protocols, restart the epBlue server.
Hint!
5.10.9
Printing the error log and debug log
As administrator you can print the error log and the debug log via the menu in the Functions tab.
This can help you identify the cause of a problem.
Hint!
The debug log can only be recorded by the administrator and is required only if the Eppendorf
Service team needs more information in the event of any faults occurring.
• The error log records all errors which occur during operation of the system.
• The debug log records detailed information on all software processes during a run, including
errors. To be able to record debug information, make sure that you are logged in as
administrator and place a tick in the Run tab in the Debug Log checkbox before starting a
program sequence (see The Run tab on p. 74).
To print the error log and the debug log, proceed as follows.
112
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5
1. Go to the Functions tab and select File - Print from the menu or click on the Print icon in the
toolbar.
The print window opens.
Operation
2. Select the logfile you want to print, and select a device, if required.
3. To print the logfile on the standard printer configured in your system, click on Print.
4. To display the logfile in a separate window, click on Preview.
The preview window is described in more detail in the "Work tab" (see Printing applications
and logfiles on p. 51) section.
5. To close the print window, click on Cancel.
113
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
6
6
6.1
Quick start
Quick start
Short instructions
6
Hint!
Quick start
6.1.1
Only trained staff already familiar with the operating manual and the epMotion may work to the
short instructions. Observe the safety precautions.
Select and start the epMotion method
1. Double-click on the Eppendorf epBlue icon on the desktop, or select Start - Programs Eppendorf - epBlue in the Windows Start menu.
epBlue starts, and the login screen appears.
2. Enter your account name and your password.
3. Click on Login.
epBlue starts and the program window displays the Home tab.
4. Click on Open / run applications in the Tasks area of the Home tab or click on the icon Open
and select Open Application or select File - Open / run applications in the main menu.
The file window opens.
5. Open the user directory and the folder containing the epMotion method you want to start.
Select the method and click on Open Application.
If the method is suitable for more than one device in your system, a list of devices is
displayed.
6. Select the device you want to use and click on OK.
The method opens and the program window changes to the Work tab.
7. In the Work tab select the Worktable tab and check the equipment of the worktable. Check
whether the labware shown in the display is available at the corresponding locations in the
worktable and whether all locations identified as empty in the display are actually empty.
8. Check whether the tip racks are sufficiently filled with tips, whether all tubes are open and
whether the waste basket is empty.
9. Close the front window of the Cleanbench.
10. Change to the Run tab and activate the option Filter Device List to display only devices that are
online and suitable for the method.
11. Select the device you want to use and click on Run.
The method is loaded on the selected device.
If the number of samples for each step in the procedure has been defined as variable, a
window opens.
12. Enter the number of samples and click on OK. If required, enter the number of samples for
further commands in the same way.
13. To edit labware-specific configurations for the level sensor and the volumes, double click on
the labware in the Worktable area of the Run tab or right click on the labware and select
Properties in the context menu.
14. To define the level sensor configurations for this method run, activate or deactivate the
corresponding options.
The level sensor can execute the following scans.
• Levels: check the liquid levels according to the settings defined for the individual labware
items.
• Tips: check the type and quantity of tips in the tip rack.
• Locations: check that the labware is positioned correctly on the worktable, as specified in
the method.
114
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
15. Click on Run.
16. If necessary enter the liquid levels for the labware objects for which the Liquid Detection has
been deactivated and click on Run.
The method starts and the display changes to the Control tab. The progress and current
status of the method is displayed. A message appears when the method run is complete.
6
17. To cancel the method before it is complete click on the icon Stop in the Control tab. The
method stops. Then click on the Abort icon to abort the method.
Example method for epMotion
6.2.1
Method objective
Quick start
6.2
Liquid such as a reagent is to be dispensed from a 30 mL reservoir in a Reservoir Rack into 16
wells of a PCR 96 plate. 16 samples from a Thermorack supplied with 1.5 mL Eppendorf micro
test tubes are then transferred into the same wells of the PCR 96 plate.
6.2.2
Sample preparation
1. Supply the Reservoir Rack with a 30 mL reservoir. Manually fill this reservoir with any volume.
2. Supply the Thermorack with 16 1.5 mL Eppendorf micro test tubes. Put any desired sample
volume in these tubes.
6.2.3
Creating the example method
Hint!
The following sections describe the steps for creating the example method specified above. To
follow these instructions, you must be familiar with the operating manual and the epMotion.
Follow the safety notes at all times. If you are not sure, please refer to the detailed description of
the Work tab (see The Work tab on p. 48).
6.2.3.1 Logging in and creating a new method
1. Log in to your user account.
2. Click Create / edit applications in the Tasks section of the Home tab, or click the New icon and
select New Application, or select File - Create / edit applications from the main menu.
The file window opens.
3. In the User list on the left hand side, select your user name to access your user directory.
4. In the Folder list, select the folder in which you want to create the new method.
115
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5. Click New Application, or right-click in the Applications list and select New Application from the
context menu, or click the Create new application icon above the Applications list.
Quick start
6
The following window opens.
6. Enter a name for the new method. If required, enter a short description of the method in the
Comment field.
7. In the Device type list, select epMotion.
8. Click Create.
The new method is created and displayed in the Applications list.
The method opens, and the program window switches to the Work tab.
6.2.3.2 Supplying the worktable
1. In the Work tab, select the Worktable tab to supply the worktable with the labware required for
your method.
2. In the Labware Type and Subtype lists, select Equipped Holders. In the Labware list, select
select the Reservoir Rack 7x30ml.
116
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
3. Right-click and drag the Reservoir Rack upwards with the mouse, then drop it in location B1.
6
Quick start
A dialog window opens, displaying information about the Reservoir Rack which has been
positioned.
4. Check whether All positions is marked for liquid detection by the optical sensor, and click OK.
5. Under Tips in the Labware list, select the 300 µL tips (tip300).
6. Right-click and drag the tips upwards with the mouse, then drop it in location A1.
117
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
A dialog window opens, displaying information about the Reservoir Rack which has been
positioned.
Quick start
6
7. Click OK.
8. Under Equipped Racks and Modules select the thermorack (Rack_1_5_mL).
9. Position the thermorack in location B2.
118
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
10. In the dialog window, check whether liquid detection is set to All Positions, and click OK.
6
Quick start
11. Under Plates and pcr96, select PCR plate EP_TT_PCR_150.
12. Position the plate in location A2.
119
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13. In the dialog window, check whether liquid detection is set to Off, and click OK. Liquid
detection is very time-consuming for plates with 96 wells.
Quick start
6
The worktable is now equipped with the necessary labware for this method.
14. To save the method with this worktable assignment, click the Save icon, or select File - Save
from the main menu, or right-click on the method name and select Save from the context
menu.
For more detailed information on supplying the worktable, please refer to the detailed description
(see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on p. 53).
120
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
6.2.3.3 Defining the procedure
1. In the Work tab, select the Procedure tab to define the sequence of commands to be carried
out when you run the method.
2. Double-click on the Number of Samples icon in the Commands section of the Procedure tab
to add a Number of Samples command to the procedure.
6
Quick start
3. In the Parameter section, activate the checkbox Fix Number of Samples and enter 8 as the
fixed number of samples.
4. Double-click on the Reagent Transfer icon in the Commands section of the Procedure tab to
append it to the program, or click on the icon, drag the command upwards and drop it in the
next program position.
5. In the Parameter section, make the following settings for the Reagent Transfer command:
• Pipet. Tool: select TM_300_8.
• Volume: enter 100 µL.
• Select Multidispense.
121
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
6. In the Source list, select the reservoir rack (Tubs_1) as source. In the Destination list, select
the PCR plate (pcr96_1) as the destination.
Quick start
6
7. To define the pattern for the Reagent Transfer, click the Pattern button.
The Pattern window opens. The source labware is shown on the left, highlighted in blue. The
destination labware is shown on the right, highlighted in red.
8. In the source labware, click on the position with the filled 30 mL reservoir. In the destination
labware, click on the first two columns (A1 and A2).
9. Click OK to confirm the pattern and close the pattern window.
10. Click on the Options tab in the parameter section for the Reagent Transfer command. Under
Change Tips, select the option when command finished.
122
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
11. Double-click on the Sample Transfer icon in the Commands section of the Procedure tab to
append it to the program, or click on the icon, drag the command upwards and drop it in the
next program position.
6
12. In the Parameter section, make the following settings for the Sample Transfer command:
Quick start
• Pipet. Tool: select TS_300.
• Volume: enter 50 µL.
• Select Pipette.
13. In the Source list, select the Reservoir Rack (Tube_1) as source, and activate the option
Irregular Source-Pattern. By selecting this option, you can define an irregular pattern for the
samples provided. In the Destination list, select the PCR plate (pcr96_1) as the destination.
14. To define the pattern for the Sample Transfer, click the Pattern button.
15. In the source labware, click on all positions containing sample tubes. After each individual
entry, switch between source and destination.
16. Switch between source and destination to select the remaining (irregular) source positions
and the (regular) destination positions. As the option Irregular Pattern is active only for the
source, the individual wells of the destination can only be selected in the regular pattern.
17. Click OK to confirm the pattern and close the pattern window.
123
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
18. Click on the Options tab in the parameter section. Under Change Tips, select the option
before asp. for next destination, well ....
Quick start
6
19. To save the method with this procedure, click the Save icon, or select File - Save from the main
menu, or right-click on the method name and select Save from the context menu.
For more detailed information on defining a procedure, please refer to the detailed description
(see Procedure tab - defining a procedure on p. 57).
6.2.3.4 Checking and saving the method
1. To check the parameter settings of the current method, select Edit - Check Method from the
main menu.
A message window opens to inform you if a parameter error was found. Correct the error and
repeat the check until all errors have been corrected.
2. To save the method, click the Save icon, or select File - Save from the main menu, or right-click
on the method name and select Save from the context menu.
6.2.4
Starting the method
1. Change to the Run tab and activate the option Filter Devicelist to display only devices which
are online and which fit the method.
2. Select the device you want to use and click Run.
The method is loaded on the selected device.
As the Number of Samples command in the procedure specifies a variable number of
samples, you must enter the number of samples for this run manually.
3. Enter the number of samples and click OK.
124
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
4. Check the supply of the worktable. To edit labware-specific settings for level sensor and
volumes, double-click the labware in the Worktable section of the Run tab.
5. Specify level sensor settings for this method run.
• Levels: check the liquid levels according to the settings defined for the individual labware
items.
6
• Tips: check the type and quantity of tips in the tip rack.
• Locations: check that the labware is positioned correctly on the worktable, as specified in
the method.
Quick start
Click Run.
A volume query appears for the MTP 96 plate, as Off was previously set for liquid detection.
6. Enter 50 µL as the volume, and click Run.
The method starts, and the display switches to the Control tab. The progress and current
status of the method is displayed. A message appears when the method run is complete.
7. To abort the method before it is complete, click the Stop icon in the Control tab. The method
stops. Then click the Abort icon to abort the method.
125
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
7
7
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
7.1
Error search
If a method does not start running after Start, check the following points. Note that the Labware
on the worktable must match the method.
•
•
•
•
7
Is plate or rack correctly inserted and not the wrong way round?
Is a height adapter with the correct height being used?
Is the front screen of the cleanbench closed?
Are the light reflectors on the front screen of the cleanbench working properly and
unchanged?
• Has the position of the cleanbench in relation to the light reflectors changed since it was
installed by the service team?
Troubleshooting
• Are all the plates, racks, tips, tubs etc.shown in the display present on the worktable of the
instrument?
•
•
•
•
Are all tubes and tubs open?
Are the tip racks filled with enough tips and have the lids been taken off the tip racks?
Is the lid of Safe-Lock tubes correctly positioned?
Are all the locations on the worktable of the instrument indicated as empty in the display really
empty?
• Is the waste container empty?
If there is a bag in the waste container: check that bag has a clean finish and check its
clamping ring. The bag must be inserted so that an adequate number of tips can be
contained. Furthermore, the bag may not project into locations B1 or A1. The clamping ring
must finish flush.
• Is the correct dispensing tool inserted and is it undamaged?
• Are the necessary filling quantities for the source present?
• Are racks or plates subsequently required for the parking positions ready and has their
volume been entered?
7.2
General errors
7.2.1
Read error of the optical sensor
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting
labware
Plates such as MTP, DWP, PCR etc. are not
level on the worktable surface or have been
inserted inverted.
Check that the labware has been correctly
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting
labware
The plastic plate is not detected.
Wipe a moist cloth several times over the
The cause might be a minor unevenness in
the the plastic surface. Such unevenness is
usually not visible.
inserted into the location.
detection range of the optical sensor on
the labware.
Repeat the Location detection with a still
lightly moist surface.
126
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting the
pipette tips
Problem when detecting pipette tips.
Turn the tip rack by 180°.
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting the
fluid level
Fluid surface not level (strong meniscus
formation).
Carefully tap the rack or plate on the table
until the surface is level.
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting the
fluid level
Blisters or foam at the surface.
Remove the blisters/foam.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
The detection of the location in plates takes place at the right margin.
Hint!
7.2.2
In case of a "Location" read error of the optical sensor a dialog with the appropriate correction
option is shown.
Dispensing error
In case of doubts about the correctness of the dispensing note the information in the appendix
and all information on the selected liquid type.
7.3
Error messages
Hint!
All software error messages are issued in English. This also applies if "German" is selected in the
language setting for the software.
Should you require service, contact your official dealer for Eppendorf products or our sales office.
You can find the addresses of our dealers on our website www.eppendorf.com. The addresses of
our sales offices are listed on the penultimate page of these Instructions for Use.
Code
Symptom/message
0x0600
Tool did not find home
0x0601
Troubleshooting
Hint!
7
Hardware error
Cause
•
•
•
•
•
•
Home position for the tool is not found.
No tool inserted.
Tool damaged.
PCB damaged.
Remedy
Switch damaged.
Insert tool.
Check tool.
Reboot and try again.
If error occurs again: Call local
Eppendorf Service.
Tool file does not correspond with tool.
Dosing motor: home switch always on.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Dosing motor: steps lost.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Dosing motor: steps lost.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Tool home position is not found.
Dosing device: final
position always found
0x0607
Hardware error
Dosing device: steps
lost
0x060D
Hardware error
Dosing device: steps
lost
0x060E
0x060F
Tool did not find home
Hardware error
Dosing device: final
position not found
0x0709
0x070A
Dosing motor: home switch not reached
again.
No tool deployed.
Tool defective.
PCB defective.
Switch defective.
Tool file and tool do not
correspond.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
The named file is invalid The file contains incorrect control
for updating the device. information. File may be damaged while
copying.
New file is essential. Call local
The cyclic redundancy The file contains incorrect control
check for the named file information. File may be damaged while
failed.
copying.
New file is essential. Call local
Eppendorf Service.
Eppendorf Service.
127
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x070B
Error Flash Loader
The file contains incorrect control
information. File may be damaged while
copying.
New file is essential. Call local
Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x0863
Thermomixer missing
The thermomixer is not configured or is
damaged.
0x0864
7
Troubleshooting
0x0865
0x0980
Thermomixer is not
configured
Hardware error
Configuration Error:
Cycler and
Thermomixer
connected!
Hardware error
Thermomixer does not
react
Hardware error
0x0954;
0x0964;
0x0974
0x0B04
Not enough space on
medium
The thermomixer is not configured or is
damaged.
It is not allowed to connect a cycler and a
thermomixer to the system.
The thermomixer does not respond to the
system.
Eppendorf Service.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
The control time on a temperature was
exceeded.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Not enough space on medium to allocate
buffer for file or directory.
Make sure that there is enough
space on medium.
Make sure that there is enough
space on medium. Either delete
some files or replace the
medium.
0x0B05
Error reading file path
• Internal file path conversion error.
Make sure that the file name
and path is valid.
0x0B08
Invalid path or filename Filename or path is invalid.
Make sure that the file name
0x0B09
Too many files/
directories open
The number of allowed open files and
directories has reached its maximum.
Close other open files.
0x0B0A
File or directory does
not exist
File or directory does not exist.
Make sure that the file name
No name or directory
found
File path is empty.
Reboot and try again.
0x0B0C
Could not open file
Filename pointer/ID invalid
0x0B0D
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use.
Reboot and try again.
Make sure that the file is not in
Error closing file or
directory.
File may be in use.
Error opening/closing
file or directory.
File may be in use.
and path is valid.
0x0B0B
0x0B0E
0x0B0F
0x0B10
0x0B11
128
Error opening file or
directory.
Error closing file or
directory.
and path is valid.
use and try to open it again.
Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to close it again.
Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to open/close it
again.
• File may be in use, or
• file is damaged.
File may be in use.
Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to open it again. If
error occurs again:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to close it again.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x0B14
File is in use and cannot
be accessed
Cause
• Logfile is opened for viewing while the
instrument tries to write into the file.
• System errors.
0x0B15
Remedy
Close file; or:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use.
Error closing file or
directory.
File may be in use.
0x0B17
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use.
Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B18
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use.
Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B40
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use. Error opening file. Does Make sure that the file is not in
it exist?
use or does the file exist and try
to open it again.
0x0B41
Error closing file or
directory.
File may be in use.
0x0B16
Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to open it again.
Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to close it again.
use and try to open it again.
7
use and try to open it again.
Troubleshooting
Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to close it again.
0x0B42
Error reading file
File may be corrupted.
0x0B43
Error writing file
File may be corrupted.
0x0B44
Illegal file length. Trying File may be corrupted.
to read or write beyond
file.
0x0B45
Error deleting file
File may be corrupted.
0x0B46
Error renaming a file
File may be corrupted.
0x0B48
Error creating file. File
exists
File name has been edited that already
exists.
Use Checkdisk
Use Checkdisk.
Use Checkdisk.
Use Checkdisk.
Use Checkdisk.
Use another name for the new
file.
0x0B80
Error creating directory. See error message.
Directory exists!
Use another name for the new
0x0B81
Error creating directory. See error message.
Directory exists!
Use another name for the new
0x0B82
Error getting file entries Some files may be deleted, or directory is
corrupt.
Use Checkdisk.
0x0B84
Error getting directory
entries
Some files may be deleted, or directory is
corrupt.
Use Checkdisk.
0x0B85
Error listing files.
Some files may be deleted, or directory is
Number of files in
corrupt.
directory is not the same
anymore.
Use Checkdisk.
0x0B88
Error deleting directory. Some files may be deleted, or directory is
corrupt.
Use Checkdisk.
0x0BC0
Format aborted by user See error message.
Error message was an
file.
file.
information for the user that he
had aborted.
0x0C01
Volume too large for this Volume to be dispensed is too large for the Call local Eppendorf Application
tool
selected tool. Possible causes:
Support.
• Errors in tool files.
• Errors in liquid type files.
0x0C02
Volume too small for this Volume to be dispensed is too small for the Call local Eppendorf
Application.
tool
selected tool.
Possible causes:
• Errors in tool files.
• Errors in liquid type files.
129
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x0C08
Tool dimension
unknown
Tool dimension values unknown. Labware
outdated or corrupt.
Make sure all labware is of the
0x1206 to
0x1210
No message text
Internal error.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x120A
Program aborted by
user
User pressed the Abort button during
program run.
Error message was an
0x1221
The hood was opened
while the program was
stopped
See error message.
Close hood.
0x1222
Transfer allowance was See error message.
prematurely deactivated
during program
initialization
Start program again.
0x1223
Internal critical error
Hardware error. Restart of program
impossible.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x1249
Step time in program is
too high.
Illegal value has been detected in program. Check step time in program and
start program again.
0x124A
Step time in program is
too low.
Illegal value has been detected in program. Check step time in program and
start program again.
0x124B
Time increment in
program is too high.
Illegal value has been detected in program. Check time increment in
program and start program
again.
0x124C
Time increment in
program is too low.
Illegal value has been detected in program. Check time increment in
program and start program
again.
0x1258
The wanted block type
does not correspond
with that of the cycler
Illegal value has been detected in program. Check block type in program
and start program again.
0x1259
Error while choosing
Neither rack or tube were selected.
rack or tube at program
start
Troubleshooting
7
0x1289
Carrier: final position in
x not found
latest version.
information for the user that he
had aborted.
Restart program and be sure to
select either rack or tube.
• Problems in carrier movement in x-axis Call local Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
• Light barrier for carrier in x-axis
defective.
0x128A
Carrier: final position in
x always found
• Problems in carrier movement in x-axis Call local Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
• Light barrier for carrier in x-axis
defective.
0x128B
Carrier: steps lost in x
• Carrier was touched by the user.
• Sluggishness in carrier movement in
x-axis.
0x128C
Carrier: final position in
y not found
instrument; if error reoccurs
after switching on and restarting
a method run:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
• Problems in carrier movement in y-axis Call Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
• Light barrier for carrier in y-axis
defective.
130
Shut down and switch off the
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x128D
Carrier: final position in
y always found
Cause
Remedy
• Problems in carrier movement in y-axis Call local Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
• Light barrier for carrier in y-axis
defective.
0x128E
Carrier: steps lost in y
• Carrier was touched by the user
• Sluggishness in carrier movement in
y-axis
0x128F
Carrier: final position 1
in z not found
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error reoccurs
after switching on and restarting
a method run:
7
Call local Eppendorf Service.
• Problems in carrier movement in z-axis Call local Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
Troubleshooting
• Light barrier for carrier in x-axis
defective.
0x1290
Carrier: final position 1
in z always found
• Problems in carrier movement in z-axis Call local Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
• Light barrier for carrier in z-axis
defective.
0x1291
Carrier: final position 2
in z not found
• Problems in carrier movement in z-axis Call local Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
• Light barrier for carrier in x-axis
defective.
0x1292
Carrier: final position 2
in z always found
• Problems in carrier movement in z-axis Call local Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
• Light barrier for carrier in z-axis
defective.
0x1293
Carrier: final position in
z wrong
• Problems in carrier movement in z-axis Call local Eppendorf Service.
(sluggish movement or no movement at
all).
• Light barrier for carrier in z-axis
defective.
0x1294
Carrier: steps lost in z
• Carrier was touched by the user.
• Sluggishness in carrier movement in
z-axis.
0x1295
Carrier:
steps lost in z before
picking up tip
• Tip was still on pipette tool when tool
started to pick up a new tip.
• Tip rack not placed correctly on the
worktable.
• Mechanical problems of carrier.
0x1296
Maximum number of
tool cycles exceeded
See error message.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error reoccurs
after switching on and restarting
a method run:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Remove tips from tools.
Place tip rack correctly and
plane on the worktable.
In other cases:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Use a new tool.
131
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x1297
Danger of collision
When running the programmed application, Program the labware on the
the tool carrier system will touch racks or
worktable in a way that high and
other labware on the worktable; e.g., during
low labware are not adjacent.
pipetting the optical sensor may touch a
Program the labware in a way
long tube on the adjacent position; possible
that the 30 µL or 300 µL tip does
reasons:
not have to move deeply into a
• A low plate (microplate) is located next
long vessel.
to a high tube rack.
If possible: use higher volumes
• The 50 µL or 300 µL tip is programmed
7
Troubleshooting
to move almost to the bottom of a very
long tube with another long tube in the
adjacent position.
Remedy
in the long vessels.
If possible: use longer tips for
the long vessels.
0x1298
Tool not calibrated
The actual tool is not calibrated.
Calibrate the actual tool.
0x1299
Invalid number of
samples
Value for Number of Samples not
permissible.
Insert an admissible value for
0x129A
Tip too small
Reagent Transfer: Used tip is too small.
Use a larger tip.
0x129B
Source vessel too small Reagent Transfer: Used source vessel is too Use a larger vessel.
small.
0x12C0
Cycler is turned off
0x12C1
Cycler is not ready
Cycler cannot be addressed by the
software; cycler may be turned off.
Command cycler cannot start because the
cycler is not ready (e.g. still running).
Number of Samples.
Switch cycler on.
If error occurs again:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Wait until cycler is ready before
starting a new application using
the cycler.
If the reason is not obvious for
this error message, call local
Eppendorf Service.
0x12C2
Cycler lid is not open
Command cycler cannot start because the
cycler lid is not open.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x12C3
Labware in cycler must
be composed of two
parts (PCR plate and
PCR lid)
Before starting the cycler command the
cycler must be equipped with a PCR plate
and a CycleLock (PCR lid = CycleLock)
above the plate.
See explanation in "Cause".
0x12C4
Upper part of the
labware stack in cycler
must be a PCR lid
See explanations for error message
0x12C3.
See explanations for error
message 0x12C3.
0x12C5
Parameter conflict: 1000 Cycler is not accessible for 1000 µL tips.
ul tip cannot be used for
destination or source
cycler
Change application. Or:
Use 300 µL or 50 µL tips.
0x12C6
Parameter conflict:
Transport rack manually.
See error message.
Rack cannot be
transported from source
cycler
0x12D0
0x12D1
132
Sample transfer with elution from filter
Elution volume too large option:
for this tool
Volume to be aspirated is too large for the
tip used.
Parameter conflict:
Select a tip large enough for
picking up the liquid as well as
the additional volume of air to be
aspirated when using this
option.
Option elution from filter: volume is too large Select a tool large enough when
using this option.
Elution volume too large for the vessel used.
for destination tube or
well
Parameter conflict:
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x12E0
Error in system
configuration
Error in system configuration.
Correct system configuration.
0x12E1
Parameter conflict:
See error message.
Change application.
See error message.
Change application.
Prewetting not possible
when aspirate from
bottom is selected
0x12E2
Parameter conflict:
Prewetting not possible
when dispense from top
is selected
7
Parameter conflict:
A liquid type using a prewetting step (e.g.,
Prewetting not possible ethanol 98%) cannot be used in
when elution from filter combination with the elution from filter
parameter in a sample transfer command.
is selected
Change application.
0x12E6
Level too high
Adjust the liquid to be dispensed
0x12E7
The liquid level would be higher than the
vessel after dispensing.
Opening the hood is not See error message.
allowed when putting
down tool.
Troubleshooting
0x12E3
to the vessel.
See error message.
Switch off power, then
switch on again to
restart method.
0x12E9
Tool not locked
This can only happen with the 5070. The
tool lock is not properly closed.
Close tool lock.
0x12F1
No communication with Hardware error
thermomixer
The thermomixer may be damaged.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x12F3
Thermomixer is too hot The temperature unit of the thermomixer is
for labware (temperature to hot for the selected labware
command in this
method)
Choose a lower temperature
0x12F4
The thermomixer is too The temperature unit of the thermomixer is
hot for labware
to hot for the selected labware
(temperature command
in previous method)
Choose a lower temperature
0x12F7
Waiting for thermomixer The procedure is waiting for the
thermomixer.
Wait until thermomixer function has
ended
0x12F8
The selected mixing
speed is not possible
with this labware
The mixing speed is not allowed for the
selected labware
Select another labware or mixing
speed
0x1500
Too big vessel index in
location: ...
A tube is to be accessed for which the index Error during creation of the
application.
is greater than the number of tubes on the
plate/rack/holder.
0x1504
<rack name> is not
accessible for tools in
location ...
Rack is a lower part of a labware stack;
therefore, the tool has no access.
Change application so that the
rack is accessible.
133
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x1509
Liquid volume too large Total volume supplied in a source vessel is
for vessel in location:... larger than needed or larger than vessel.
Remedy
Provide less volume in the
vessel.
Change application.
When verifying the total volume
needed for the source or
destination, take into account
additional aspirated volume in
case of multidispense
mode(see Important volume
terms for tubes and wells on
p. 18).
7
epMotion 5070 only:
Set liquid detection to off for racks
Troubleshooting
that are on park positions at the
beginning of the procedure.
0x150A
Liquid volume too low
Total volume supplied by the user in a
Calculate the total volume for
for vessel in location: ... source vessel is smaller than needed for a
the source or destination vessel
sample transfer, reagent transfer or mix
and select a suitable vessel.
command (total volume = volume to be
Regarding additional aspirated
aspirated + remaining volume for this vessel
volume in case of multidispense
mode, refer to manual
+ (in case of multidispense mode:)
additional aspirated volume.
(see Important volume terms for
tubes and wells on p. 18).
Consider that the software may
calculate higher remaining
volumes in some cases to avoid
crashes.
Set liquid detection to off for racks
that are on park positions at the
beginning of the procedure.
0x150B
Optical sensor:
See above (error 0x150A).
See above (error 0x150A).
Liquid volume too low in
location: ...
0x150D
Optical sensor: Plate
could not be found in
location: ...
Optical sensor: Rack
could not be found in
location: ...
The rack programmed for this location could Place the rack onto the locations
not be found by the optical sensor; possible
as edited in the corresponding
causes:
application; or:
• Rack not placed onto location (wrong
Make sure that the rack is
• Rack in wrong orientation.
• Problems related to the optical sensor
Rotate rack 180° (front to back)
rack code or wrong rack height).
function.
0x150E
Optical sensor:
The tip rack programmed for this location
Tips could not be found could not be found by the optical sensor;
possible causes:
in location ...
• Tip rack not placed onto location.
• Problems related to the optical sensor
function.
134
placed plane on the worktable
surface; or:
and place it back onto the
worktable location; or:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Place the tip rack onto the
locations as edited in the
corresponding application; or:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x1510
Optical sensor: Nothing See error message.
could be found in
location:
Remedy
Place the labware programmed
for this location on the
worktable.
If error occurs again:
0x1512
Tip type ... is not placed Tips that are needed according to the
on the worktable
application are not available on the
worktable.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Place the tip tray programmed
for this location on the
worktable.
If error occurs again:
0x1513
Optical sensor: Rack in
wrong orientation in
location ...
The position to be addressed by the tool
carrier is outside of its available range.
If error occurs again:
Possible cause: Rack in park position is
programmed to be addressed by the
dispensing tool.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
The tub holder has been placed onto the
worktable in the wrong direction.
Rotate tub holder 180° and
Troubleshooting
0x1514
Position is out of range
7
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Change application.
place it back onto the worktable;
restart the application.
0x1515
Tool cannot be used for Distance between tip cones of the liquid
Change application.
rack in location ...
handling tool does not match the distance
between vessels (e.g., 24 tubes - rack does
not fit the 8-channel tool).
0x1516
No vessel in location: ... Vessels that are needed according to the
application are not available on the
worktable (vessel/rack combination).
Place the vessel/rack
combination programmed for
this location on the worktable.
If error occurs again:
0x1519
Tip is too thick for vessel Diameter of the destination vessel is too
in location: ...
small for the tip when dispensing the liquid.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Select other tips or vessels in
the application.
Select dispense from top in the
options of the liquid handling
command.
0x151A
Optical sensor:
The optical sensor has detected a cap on a Remove the cap from the vessel
and start the run again.
There is a cap on vessel vessel when trying to detect a liquid level.
in location: ...
0x151B
Optical sensor: There is Relates to vessels that are equipped with a Place the vessel onto the
a wrong vessel in
readable code (e.g. Eppendorf tubs): The
location as edited in the
location: ...
rack programmed for this location could not
corresponding application; or:
be found by the optical sensor; possible
Call local Eppendorf Application
causes:
Support.
• Wrong vessel.
• Problems related to the optical sensor
function.
0x151C
Optical sensor:
Level detection for very high vessels is not
Vessel too high for level possible.
detection in location: ...
Switch off the level detection for
this vessel.
Use level detection only for
vessel/rack equipment with a
total height below 103 mm.
135
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x151E
Detected volume is out
of detection range ...
Normally a system/hardware error
Do not fill vessels above the
(malfunction of the optical sensor); but may
specified maximum filling
also be caused by filling a vessel up to the
volume.
total vessel height.
In other cases:
0x151F
7
0x1526
A maximum of 5 racks can be stacked in a
location. Placing more than 5 racks in a
Maximum pieces which location.
may be piled:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Do not stack more than 5 racks
in a location.
No free position for
deposition of tool
available
When trying to deposit the dispensing tool
after use the tool holder did not find a free
position for the tool.
Clear at least one position on
Method program may
not use more than four
dispensing tools
See error message.
If more than 4 dispensing tools
0x152B
Plates cannot be
transported by the
gripper from the cycler
location.
A transport command to move a PCR plate Change application.
from the cycler is not allowed.
0x152D
Tip too short
Select other tips or
vessels in the method.
Select other tips or vessels in
Tip does not reach the liquid level at the
the application.
beginning or during the course of the liquid
handling command.
Optical sensor:
Error in level detection.
Repeat measurement.
0x1528
Troubleshooting
Labware stack too high
in location:
Remedy
0x1581
the worktable to accept a
dispensing tool.
are needed, divide the
application into two applications
that use no more than 4
dispensing tools.
Liquid level could not be
detected in location: ...
0x1600
Header not detected
Cycler editor: Header command not
detected File damaged.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x1601
Load filename
Command in the file is not a cycler
command File damaged.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x1603
Load filename
0x1700
• Cycler editor: End command not found. Call local Eppendorf Service.
• File damaged.
Total volume supplied by the user in a
Calculate the total volume for
Liquid volume too low
for vessel in location: ... source vessel is smaller than needed for a
sample transfer, reagent transfer or mix
command (total volume = volume to be
aspirated + remaining volume for this vessel
+ (in case of multidispense mode:)
additional aspirated volume.
the source or destination vessel
and select a suitable vessel.
Regarding additional aspirated
volume in case of multidispense
mode, refer to manual
(see Important volume terms for
tubes and wells on p. 18).
Consider that the software may
calculate higher remaining
volumes in some cases to avoid
crashes.
Set liquid detection to off for racks
that are on park positions at the
beginning of the procedure.
136
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x1701
Liquid volume too large Total volume supplied in a source vessel is
for vessel in location:... larger than needed or larger than vessel.
Remedy
Provide less volume in the
vessel.
Change application.
When verifying the total volume
needed for the source or
destination, take into account
additional aspirated volume in
case of multidispense
mode(see Important volume
terms for tubes and wells on
p. 18).
7
epMotion 5070 only:
Set liquid detection to off for racks
0x1900
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Troubleshooting
that are on park positions at the
beginning of the procedure.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
0x1901
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1902
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1903
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1904
The following labware
has been deleted: ...
Edit mode:
The worktable was changed after an
application had been programmed; thus, the
labware defined in a command is no longer
available.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Change the source or destination
in the parameter of the
respective command in
accordance to match the
worktable. In this case the
pattern also has to be re-edited;
The labware has to be
reprogrammed in the worktable.
0x1905
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1906
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1907
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1908
The method was written See Error message.
with a newer program
structure. You must
update your software if
you want to edit this
method
0x1909
Loading error
File damaged.
0x190A
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Update your software, or:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
0x190B
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
137
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x190C
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
0x190D
Troubleshooting
7
The following labware is Edit mode/worktable:
not selected in the
The chosen labware is not available in the
Labware File window: ... labware collection that had been selected
for your lab. Possible cause for this error
message: The labware has been deselected
in the Labware File window.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Select the respective labware in
the Labware File window. You
need to have the appropriate
user rights. If you do not have
the necessary user rights ask
your administrator.
0x190E
Select the respective labware in
The following tool is not Edit mode/procedure:
the Labware File window. You
selected in the Labware The chosen tool is not available in the
need to have the appropriate
File Window: ...
labware collection that had been selected
user rights. If you do not have
for your lab. Possible cause for this error
the necessary user rights ask
message: The labware has been deselected
your administrator.
in the Labware File window.
0x190F
The following liquid is
Edit mode/procedure:
not selected in the
The chosen liquid option is not available in
Labware File Window: ... the labware collection that had been
selected for your lab. Possible cause for this
error message: The labware has been
deselected in the Labware File window.
0x1910
This selection could only be
deactivate/activate by Eppendorf
Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
The method was written The position of required labware is not
Load the concerned application
for another workstation available on this device e.g. you have a
on a compatible device, or
configuration
5075 MC and the application was written on Modify the application until it
an 5075 LH and labware were assigned to
The position of the
matches the available device.
following labware is not positions A4, B4 and C4 are now occupied
by a cycler.
available on this
worktable
The position of the
Edit mode/worktable: The chosen labware Place the respective labware on
another position.
following labware is not may not be placed on the selected position
allowed anymore
anymore. Possible cause for this error
message: The application has been written
yyy
with a former version of the software.
in location: xxx
0x1911
0x1980 to
0x1983
The following labware
has been changed, so
that the pattern does not
fit anymore: xxx
As it is possible to change the order or
contents of an “Equipped Holder”
combination, it can happen that the recent
pattern of a command does not fit the new
positions of the tubes.
Either change the order or
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Restart application run or restart
contents of the “Equipped
Holder” combination back to the
original. Or change the pattern
in the command.
system.
If error occurs again:
0x1984
No parameter for tool/
liquid.
Edit mode/parameter in command Sample
Transfer:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Select another tool or another
liquid type.
A special file for the selected combination of
tool and liquid type is not available.
0x1985
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
138
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1986
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
0x1A02
0x1A03
0x1A04
Edit mode / labware:
This position is not
available for the
selected labware
Edit mode/worktable:
The selected labware
may not be stacked on
top of labware already
placed
Edit mode/worktable:
Labware stack too high
in location: xxx
Edit mode/worktable:
Maximum height: xxx
mm
0x1A10
0x1A11
0x1A12
The same name has been defined for a
different rack or another labware item.
Certain worktable positions are not allowed
for certain labware (e.g., tips can only be
placed in the rear of the worktable).
Place the selected labware in
another location.
7
See "Cause".
Building of labware stacks on the worktable
is restricted to certain labware combinations
(e.g., thermorack above thermorack does
not make sense).
Troubleshooting
0x1A06
The name is already
used for another
labware
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Enter a different name.
See "Cause".
Labware stacks on the worktable may not
exceed a maximum height limit (e.g., plates
on adapters is allowed; reservoir holder on
adapters is not allowed because the stack
would become too high).
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command Sample
Transfer:
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack.
Edit mode/parameter in command Sample
Transfer:
Choose another rack or another
tool.
Source rack does not fit to 8-channel-tool
(e.g.: 24-well-plate or tube rack with 24
positions).
Choose another rack or another
tool.
Destination rack does not fit the 8-channel
tool (e.g. 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command Sample
selected
Transfer:
Select source or destination,
respectively.
Source or destination rack has not been
selected.
0x1A15
Invalid entry for
movement blow (0 ...
100)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer command: Enter a value between 0 and
100%.
A value beyond the allowed range has been
0x1A16
Invalid entry for delay
blow (0 ... 9999)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer command: Enter a value between 0 and
9999 msec.
A value beyond the allowed range has been
entered for the parameter Movement Blow.
entered for the parameter Delay Blow.
0x1A17
Invalid entry for speed
aspiration (0.2 ... 110)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer command: Enter a value between 0.2 and
110 mm/sec.
A value beyond the allowed range has been
entered for the parameter speed aspiration.
0x1A19
Invalid entry for speed
blow (0.2 ... 110)
0x1A1A
Invalid entry for initial
stroke (0 ... 100)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer command: Enter a value between 0.2 and
110 mm/sec.
A value beyond the allowed range has been
entered for the parameter Speed Blow.
Edit mode/parameter in transfer command: Enter a value between 0 and
a value beyond the allowed range has been
100%.
entered for the parameter initial stroke.
139
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1A20
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command Reagent
Transfer:
Choose another rack or another
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode/parameter in command Reagent
Transfer:
0x1A21
7
0x1A22
tool.
Source rack does not fit the 8-channel tool
(e.g., 24-well plate or tube rack with 24
positions).
Choose another rack or another
tool.
Destination rack does not fit the 8-channel
tool (e.g., 24-well plate or tube rack with 24
positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command Reagent
selected
Transfer:
Select source or destination,
respectively.
Troubleshooting
Source or destination rack has not been
selected.
0x1A30
0x1A31
0x1A32
0x1A40
0x1A41
0x1A42
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command Pool:
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode/parameter in command Pool:
Source rack does not fit the 8-channel tool
(e.g., 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
Destination rack does not fit the 8-channel
tool (e.g. 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
Choose another rack or another
tool.
Choose another rack or another
tool.
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command Pool:
selected
Source or destination rack has not been
selected.
Select source or destination,
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command
PoolOneDest:
Choose another rack or another
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode/parameter in command
PoolOneDest:
respectively.
tool.
Source rack does not fit the 8-channel tool
(e.g., 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
Choose another rack or another
tool.
Destination rack does not fit the 8-channel
tool (e.g. 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command
selected
PoolOneDest:
Select source or destination,
respectively.
Source or destination rack has not been
selected.
0x1A50
0x1A51
0x1A52
140
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command Dilute:
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode/parameter in command Dilute:
Source rack does not fit the 8-channel tool
(e.g., 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
Destination rack does not fit the 8-channel
tool (e.g. 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command Dilute:
selected
Source or destination rack has not been
selected.
Choose another rack or another
tool.
Choose another rack or another
tool.
Select source or destination,
respectively.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1A61
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this rack
Edit mode/parameter in command Mix:
Choose another rack or another
0x1A62
No rack selected
Edit mode/parameter in command Mix:
0x1A65
Invalid entry for speed
(0.2 ... 110)
Edit mode/parameter in command Mix:
0x1A70
This position is already
occupied
Edit mode/pattern:
Delete function only
available for last entry
Edit mode/pattern:
A rack may only have
384 positions
Edit mode/pattern:
Rack does not fit the 8-channel tool (e.g.,
24-well plate or tube rack with 24 positions).
tool.
Select rack, respectively.
Rack has not been selected.
0x1A75
0x1A76
When editing the pattern you have tried to
select a certain position that is already
occupied.
Deleting a pattern position you just entered
is only possible as long as you did not leave
the source (or the destination, respectively).
Not enough software memory available for
editing the pattern. Maximum possible
positions are 384.
pattern and move to a different
position.
If you have to delete this position
which is no more available you
must edit a new pattern from the
beginning (softkey new pattern or
cancel).
Choose another rack, because
the chosen rack has too many
positions.
8-channel tool cannot
Edit mode/pattern:
be used for this module Rack does not fit the 8-channel tool (e.g.,
rack
Tubs + Modules (equip) +
Holders-combination with positions all less
than 8 in Modules).
Choose another rack or another
0x1A77
No module rack or tubes Edit mode/pattern:
found
Rack does not have any positions (e.g.,
Tubs + Modules (equip) +
Holders-combination with positions all less
than 1 in Modules).
Choose another rack.
0x1A78
Number of tubes not
supported
Choose another rack.
Edit mode/pattern:
7
Follow the direction of the edited
Troubleshooting
0x1A73
Enter a value between 0.2 and
A value beyond the allowed range has been 110 mm/sec.
entered for the parameter Speed .
tool.
One or more Modules have 3, 5, 6, 7 or
more than 8 positions. This is not
supported.
0x1A80
Invalid entry for minutes Edit mode/parameter in command Wait:
Enter a value between 0 and 99
(0 ... 99)
minutes.
A value beyond the allowed range has been
entered for the parameter minutes.
0x1A81
Invalid entry for seconds Edit mode/parameter in command Wait:
Enter a value between 0 and 59
(0 ... 59)
seconds.
A value beyond the allowed range has been
entered for the parameter seconds.
0x1A90
Selecting more than one Edit mode/parameter in transfer command: Choose another rack.
rack as Source or as
The selected labwares have a different
Destination:
amount of wells.
All source racks (or all
destination racks, resp.)
must have the same well
pattern
141
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x1A91
Selecting more than one Edit mode/parameter in transfer command: Enter a value between 0 and
rack as Source or as
110 degrees.
A labware may not be selected more than
Destination:
once.
Rack was already
selected as source rack
(or as destination rack,
resp.)
0x1AC0
Only cycler program
possible
7
0x1AD0
Cause
Edit mode/in command Start Cycler:
Remedy
Please select a cycler program.
The selected application must be a cycler
program.
Invalid entry for lid
Edit mode/parameter in command Temp
temperature (37 ... 110) Cycler:
Enter a value between 37 and
110 degrees.
Troubleshooting
A value beyond the allowed range has been
entered for the parameter Temperature.
Invalid entry for block
temperature (4.0 ...
99.0)
Edit mode/parameter in command Temp
Cycler:
0x1AE0
Invalid entry for mixing
speed (0 ... 2000)
Enter a value between 0 and 2000
Edit mode / parameter in command
”Thermomixer”: a value beyond the allowed rpm
range has been entered for the parameter
”speed”
0x1AE1
Invalid entry for minutes Edit mode / parameter in command
Enter a value between 0 and 120
(0 ... 120)
”Thermomixer”: a value beyond the allowed minutes
range has been entered for the parameter
”minutes”
0x1AE2
Invalid entry for seconds Edit mode / parameter in command
Enter a value between 0 and 59
(0 ... 59)
”Thermomixer”: a value beyond the allowed seconds
range has been entered for the parameter
”seconds”
0x1AE3
Invalid entry for
temperature (4 ... 110)
Edit mode / parameter in command
Enter a value between 4 and 110
”Thermomixer”: a value beyond the allowed degrees
range has been entered for the parameter
”temperature”
0x1C00 to
0x1C09
File could not be read
File damaged.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x1C0B
Sample number too
large
Run mode:
Start the application again and
0x1AD1
142
99.0 degrees.
A value beyond the allowed range has been
entered for the parameter Temperature.
enter a lower number of
The number of samples you entered will fill
samples; or:
more than one rack (source or destination,
respectively) based on the programmed
Enter the edit mode and
pattern.
program a pattern that together
with the number of samples you
want to run will not extend
beyond one rack.
0x1C0C
File could not be read
File damaged.
0x1C0D
You must clear old
pattern first
Edit mode/pattern:
Press "new pattern"
Enter a value between 4.0 and
You tried to change a stored pattern before
deleting the old pattern.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Delete the old pattern by
pressing the button new pattern.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1C0E
You must go forward
Edit mode/pattern:
See explanation in "Cause".
When entering the pattern, the order of
edited locations in the source (or
destination, respectively) must be from left
to right or from the top of the pattern
downwards (i.e., move only in columns or in
rows).
0x1C0F
You may only move
Edit mode/pattern:
horizontally or vertically When entering the pattern the order of
edited locations in the source (or
destination, resp.) must be from the left to
right or from top of the pattern downwards
(i.e., move only in columns or in rows).
See explanation in "Cause".
7
0x1C10
Pattern for replicates of Edit mode/pattern:
first sample too complex The pattern algorithm cannot handle this
pattern.
Troubleshooting
Note: Error message may also occur when
working with an 8-channel tool and editing
another position than the upper ones (see
error code 0x1C1F).
Enter a simpler pattern if
possible.
In case this is not possible:
Call local Eppendorf Application
Support.
0x1C11
Pattern too complex
Edit mode/pattern:
Enter a simpler pattern if
The pattern algorithm cannot handle this
pattern.
In case this is not possible:
Note: See note in error 0x1C0F.
Call local Eppendorf Application
Internal program error.
Restart application run or restart
possible.
Support.
0x1C12
Program error/system
error
system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C13
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C14
0x1C15
Pattern must fit in rows
or columns
Pattern too complex
Edit mode/pattern:
The basic unit of the pattern you tried to
enter extends beyond a row or a column.
This cannot be handled by the pattern
algorithm.
Edit mode/pattern:
The pattern algorithm cannot handle this
pattern.
Note: See note in error 0x1C0F.
0x1C16
0x1C17
This position is already
occupied
Edit mode/pattern:
You must start with the
source
Edit mode/pattern:
When editing the pattern you have tried to
select a certain rack position that is already
occupied.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Enter a simpler pattern if
possible.
In case this is not possible:
Call local Eppendorf Application
Support.
Enter a simpler pattern if
possible.
In case this is not possible:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Following the edited pattern
move to a different rack position.
See explanation in "Cause".
When editing a pattern you must start with
the source.
143
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1C18
Please enter a source
now
Edit mode/pattern:
Enter the same number of
Please enter a
destination now
Edit mode/pattern:
No more positions
available (limited by
Number of Samples
command)
Edit mode/pattern:
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
0x1C19
7
0x1C1A
Troubleshooting
0x1C1B
In the destination rack, you tried to enter
more replicates than you had sources.
When having selected a source in the
“Sample Transfer” command you first have
to enter a destination for this source before
moving to the next source position
Editing further positions is not possible
because the limit set in the Number of
Samples command would be exceeded.
replicates for all sources you
edit when programming a
pattern.
Edit the destination position(s)
for the selected source position.
Select a pattern that fits the
programmed Number of Samples
command.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C1C
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C1D
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Restart application run or restart
system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C1E
Pattern for reagent
transfer:
Edit mode/pattern for command Reagent
Transfer:
source can be chosen
only once
After having entered the source and the
destinations for the reagent transfer you
cannot select an additional source.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Enter the source only once. In
case this does not meet your
requirements for this application
consider selecting command
Sample Transfer instead of
Reagent Transfer; or:
Call local Eppendorf Application
Support.
0x1C1F
Pattern with 8-channel
tool:
Please edit upper
position of this tool
0x1C20
0x1C21
144
Edit mode/pattern with 8-channel tool:
See explanation in "Cause".
Only the upper positions of the 8-channel
tools can be selected.
Pattern for sample
transfer:
Edit mode/pattern for command Sample
Transfer:
only one position per
sample on source
Before selecting a second source position,
you have to edit the destination for the first
source position.
In source rack further
positions cannot be
edited because
positions in destination
rack are already
occupied
Edit mode/pattern:
Selecting further source positions would
require a second destination rack according
to the pattern you edited.
Enter destination for the source
you just selected; afterwards,
you can edit the next source
position.
Edit a pattern that does not
require more than one
destination rack per command.
To use more destination racks,
create additional commands.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x1C22
Pattern for pool one
Edit mode/pattern for command
Enter the destination only once.
dest: destination can be PoolOneDest:
In case this does not meet your
chosen only once
requirements for this application,
After having entered the sources and the
consider selecting command
destination, you cannot select an additional
Pool instead of PoolOneDest; or:
destination.
Call local Eppendorf Application
Support.
0x1C23
Pattern for dilute:
Edit mode/pattern for command Dilute:
only one position per
sample on source
Before selecting a second source position,
you have to edit the destination for the first
source position.
0x1C25
Pattern for pool:
Edit mode/pattern for command Pool:
only one position per
sample on destination
Before selecting a second destination
position, you have to edit the next source
positions to be pooled into this destination.
Pattern for Reagent
Transfer: not enough
source positions
Run mode: To provide enough reagent
volume for the number of samples you
entered, the selected reagent source
positions must be higher.
Remedy
Enter destination for the source
you just selected; afterwards,
you can edit the next source
position.
7
Enter sources for the next
destination position; afterwards,
you can edit the next destination
position.
Troubleshooting
0x1C26
Cause
Start the application again and
enter a lower number of
samples; or:
Enter the edit mode and
program more reagent source
positions in the pattern. Keep in
mind that the selected reagent
source positions may not extend
beyond one rack.
Axis may have a slight tilt.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x201D
(SVC_CALIB_CYC_AN
GLE_TOLERANCE)
Cycler: angle tolerance
is too big.
0x2025
Bottom tolerance too big Bottom tolerance too big.
0x2026
Bottom tolerance too
small
0x2027
(SVC_ILLEGAL_NODE Internal error.
_TYPE)
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x2100
Program error/system
error
Restart application run or restart
Bottom tolerance too small.
Internal program error.
Use a smaller value.
Use a bigger value.
system.
If error occurs again:
0x2101
Tool not defined.
Parameter Pipet. Tool was not edited in the
application.
0x2102
Tool not selected in the
Labware File Window
The pipette tool you edited in the application
is not selected in the Labware File Window
and therefore is not available for
programming.
0x2104
Tips not edited in
worktable/procedure
Tips were edited in the procedure of the
application, but they were not edited in the
worktable (e.g., filter tips <-> tips without
filter).
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Source parameters of the
source vessel do not match (Volume is
higher than the maximum filling volume of
the source vessel).
0x2105
Start volume greater
than filling volume of
source tube or well
Call local Eppendorf Service.
See explanation in "Cause".
This selection could only be
deactivate/activated by Eppendorf
Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Edit the tips that you
programmed in the procedure in
the worktable.
Edit Volume and Source in the
worktable so that Volume is
covered by the maximum filling
volume of the source vessel.
145
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x2106
Parameter conflict: Start
volume greater than
filling volume of
destination tube or well
The Volume and Destination parameters of Edit Volume and Destination in
the destination vessel do not match (Volume
the worktable so that Volume is
is higher than the maximum filling volume of
covered by the maximum filling
the destination vessel).
volume of the destination
vessel.
0x2107
Volume not defined
Parameter Volume was not edited in the
application.
0x2108
Parameter conflict:
7
Troubleshooting
0x2109
Remedy
See explanation in "Cause".
The Volume and Pipet. Tool parameters of
the
application do not match (Volume is
Volume too small for this
smaller
than the lower limit of the tool
tool
volume range).
Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
The Volume and Pipet. Tool parameters of
the
application do not match (Volume is
Volume too large for this
higher than the upper limit of the tool
tool
volume range).
Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
Parameter conflict:
that Volume is covered by the
volume range of the pipette tool.
that Volume is covered by the
volume range of the pipette tool.
0x210A
Parameter conflict:
volume greater than
filling volume of source
tube or well
The Volume and Source parameters of the
application do not match (Volume is higher
than the maximum filling volume of the
source vessel).
Edit Volume and Source so that
0x210B
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Destination parameters of
the application do not match (Volume is
higher than the maximum filling volume of
the destination vessel).
Edit Volume and Destination so
volume greater than
filling volume of
destination tube or well
Volume is covered by the
maximum filling volume of the
source vessel.
that Volume is covered by the
maximum filling volume of the
destination vessel.
0x210D
Source rack not defined Parameter Source was not edited in the
application.
0x210E
Source rack not edited
in worktable
0x210F
Select the rack in the Labware
Source rack not
The source rack you edited in the
File Window or edit a different
selected in the Labware application is not selected or removed in the
rack in the application.
File Window
Labware File Window and therefore is not
available for programming.
0x2110
Destination rack not
defined
Parameter Source was not edited in the
application.
See explanation in "Cause".
0x2111
Destination rack not
edited in worktable
Destination rack was edited in the
procedure of the application, but it was not
edited in the worktable.
Edit the rack that you
See explanation in "Cause".
The source rack you edited in the procedure Edit the rack that you
of the application has been removed from
programmed in the procedure
the worktable.
as Source in the worktable, or
edit a different source rack in the
application.
programmed in the procedure
as Destination in the worktable
or edit a different destination
rack in the application.
0x2112
Select the rack in the Labware
Destination rack not
The destination rack you edited in the
File Window or edit a different
selected in the Labware application is not selected or removed in the
rack in the application.
File Window
Labware File Window and therefore is not
available for programming.
0x2113
Pattern not defined
Parameter Pattern was not edited in the
application.
See explanation in "Cause".
0x2114
Loading error (invalid
entry in pattern)
Normally a system error; but may also be
caused by editing a pattern without
destination positions; or:
Edit a pattern with source and
destination positions.
In other cases:
File damaged.
0x211B
Liquid type not defined
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Parameter Liquid Type was not edited in the Choose a "Liquid Type" for the
application.
146
Liquid Handling Command.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x211C
Liquid type not selected The Liquid Type you choose in the
in the Labware File
application is not selected or removed in the
Window
Labware File Window and therefore is not
available for programming.
0x211D
Mixing cycles in source
not defined
Parameter No. of Cycles in a mix procedure See explanation in "Cause".
was not edited for the source in the
application (mix procedure as defined in a
command Mix or as part of a liquid transfer
command via parameter Options).
0x211E
Invalid entry for mixing
cycles in source
(1 ... 99)
Enter a number between 1 and
Entry for the No. of Cycles parameter in a
99 for the No. of Cycles
mix procedure for source vessels was
parameter.
higher than the max. limit (1 up to 99 cycles)
(mix procedure as defined in a command
Mix or as part of a liquid transfer command
via parameter Options).
0x211F
Invalid entry for mixing
speed in source
(1 ... 10)
Entry for the parameter Speed in a mix
procedure for source vessels was higher
than the max. limit (1 up to 10) (mix
procedure as defined in a command Mix or
as part of a liquid transfer command via
parameter Options).
0x2120
See explanation in "Cause".
Mixing volume in source Parameter Volume in a mix procedure for
not defined
source vessels was not edited in the
application (mix procedure as defined in a
command Mix or as part of a liquid transfer
command via parameter Options).
0x2121
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Pipet. Tool parameters of a Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
that Volume is within pipette
mixing volume in source mix procedure for source vessels are not in
tool's volume range.
too large for this tool
agreement (Volume is higher than the upper
limit of the tool's volume range) (mix
procedure as defined in a command Mix or
as part of a liquid transfer command via
parameter Options).
0x2122
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Pipet. Tool parameters of a Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
that Volume is within the pipette
mixing volume in source mix procedure for source vessels do not
tool's volume range.
too small for this tool
match (Volume is less than the lower limit of
the tool's volume range) (mix procedure as
defined in a command Mix or as part of a
liquid transfer command via parameter
Options).
0x2123
Parameter conflict:
Remedy
This selection could only be
deactivate/activated by Eppendorf
Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
7
Troubleshooting
mixing volume in source
greater than filling
volume of source tube
or well
Cause
Enter a number between 1 and
10 for the Speed parameter.
The Volume and Source parameters of a mix Edit Volume and Source so that
Volume is within the allowable
procedure in the application do not match
filling volume of the source
(Volume is higher than the maximum filling
vessel.
volume of the source vessel) (mix procedure
as defined in a command Mix or as part of a
liquid transfer command via parameter
Options).
0x2124
Mixing cycles in
destination not defined
Parameter No. of Cycles in a mix procedure See explanation in "Cause".
for destination vessels was not edited in the
application (mix procedure as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter Options)
0x2125
Invalid entry for mixing
cycles in destination
(1 ... 99)
Entry for the parameter No. of Cycles in a
Enter a number between 1 and
mix procedure for destination vessels was
99 for the No. of Cycles
higher than the max. limit (1 up to 99 cycles)
parameter.
(mix procedure as part of a liquid transfer
command via parameter Options).
147
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Troubleshooting
7
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x2126
Invalid entry for mixing
speed in destination
(1 ... 10)
Entry for the parameter Speed in a mix
procedure for destination vessels was
higher than the max. limit (1 up to 10) (mix
procedure as part of a liquid transfer
command via parameter Options).
Enter a number between 1 and
0x2127
Mixing volume in
destination not defined
See explanation in "Cause".
Parameter Volume in a mix procedure for
destination vessels was not edited in the
application (mix procedure as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter Options).
0x2128
Parameter conflict:
0x2129
Parameter conflict:
mixing volume in
destination too small for
this tool
Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
The Volume and Pipet. Tool in a mix
that Volume is within the volume
procedure for destination vessels do not
range of the pipet tool.
match (Volume is lower than the minimum
allowed volume) (mix procedure as part of a
liquid transfer command via parameter
Options).
0x212A
Parameter conflict:
mixing volume in
destination greater than
filling volume of
destination tube or well
The Volume and Destination parameters in a Edit Volume and Destination so
that Volume is within the
mix procedure for destination vessels do not
maximum filling volume of the
match (Volume is higher than the maximum
destination vessel.
filling volume of the destination vessel) (mix
procedure as part of a liquid transfer
command via parameter Options).
0x212C
Parameter conflict:
0x212D
The Volume and Pipet. Tool parameters in a Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
that Volume is within the pipette
mix procedure for destination vessels do not
mixing volume in
tool's volume range.
destination too large for match (Volume is higher than the upper limit
of
the
tool
volume
range)
(mix
procedure
as
this tool
part of a liquid transfer command via
parameter Options).
When the transfer type parameter is set to
mix after dispense not multidispense, the mix after dispense
allowed in multidispense parameter cannot be edited for this
command.
mode
Change parameter transfer type
Parameter conflict:
Choose another rack or another
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
0x212E
0x212F
148
10 for the Speed parameter.
Edit mode / parameter in liquid handling
command:
to pipette; or:
Omit the mixing step; in this
case you could also edit another
mixing step as a new command
(Mix), which would be performed
after the previous command of
the procedure has ended.
tool.
Source rack does not fit the 8-channel tool
(e.g., 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
Parameter conflict:
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode / parameter in liquid handling
command:
Sample number too
large
The number of samples you have entered
will fill more than one rack (source or
destination, respectively) based on the
programmed pattern.
Choose another rack or another
tool.
Destination rack does not fit the 8-channel
tool (e.g. 24-well plate or tube rack with
24 positions).
Program a pattern that together
with the number of samples you
want to run will not extend
beyond one rack, or choose a
lower number of samples in the
corresponding Number of
Samples command.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x2130
Parameter conflict: tip
cannot be used for this
source rack
The Source rack parameter in the liquid
handling command does not match the
selected tool (e.g., 384-well plate and
TS_1000 or TM1000_8).
Choose another rack or another
0x2131
Parameter conflict: tip
cannot be used for this
destination rack
The Destination rack parameter in the liquid Choose another rack or another
tool.
handling command does not match the
selected tool (e.g., 384-well plate and
TS_1000 or TM1000_8).
0x2132
Invalid number of
samples (1 ... 384)
Number of samples you have entered is too Enter a maximum number of
high.
samples up to 384.
0x2136
Invalid entry for seconds Edit mode/parameter in command Wait:
Enter a value between 0 and 59
(1 ... 59)
seconds.
A value beyond the allowed range has been
entered for the seconds parameter.
0x2137
Invalid entry for minutes Edit mode/parameter in command Wait:
(1 ... 99)
A value above the allowable maximum
minutes has been entered for the minutes
parameter.
Enter a value between 0 and 99
Method without active
commands
application contains only passive
commands (like wait, comment, etc.).
Insert at least one active
Parameter conflict:
Pool/POD:
Do not mix.
0x2139
7
Troubleshooting
0x2138
tool.
minutes.
command.
mix before aspirating not Mix before aspirating not allowed in
allowed in multiaspirate multiaspirate mode.
mode
0x213A
0x213A
Labware to be
Parameter in command Exchange:
exchanged are identical Both values point to the same labware.
Enter a new labware for one of
Labware to be
Parameter in command Exchange: Both
exchanged are identical values point to the same labware.
Enter a new labware for one of
the two positions.
the two positions.
0x2170
Parameter conflict:
To edit the elution from filter option a filter
Parameter elution from plate must have been edited as source.
filter is only possible
when filter plates have
been selected as source
See explanations in "Cause".
0x2171
Parameter conflict:
See explanation in the error
See explanation in the error message.
message.
Multidispense mode is
not allowed when
selected elution from
filter
0x2172
Parameter conflict:
Transfer volume must
be set to zero when
Parameter elution from
filter has been selected
Using the elution from filter option, the
Set the volume to zero because
complete volume contained in the filter plate
the entry will not have an effect
wells is always aspirated; therefore, editing
in the application run.
a volume to be transferred is not possible.
0x2173
Elution from filter is only File damaged.
possible in a sample
transfer
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x2180
Cycler is not installed
Cycler unit is not listed in the configuration
file.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x2181
Name of cycler method
is not edited
Using the cycler command the name of the See explanation in "Cause".
cycler application to be used must be edited
in the epMotion command.
149
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x2182
Cycler method is not
available
The cycler application selected in the
epMotion command cycler is not available.
Select a different cycler
application.
If the application should be
available but is not recognized by
the software:
0x2183
Cycler command is not The cycler command must always be the
last command in method last command of a epMotion application.
Troubleshooting
7
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Do not add other commands
after a cycler command. To run
other procedures after or during
the cycler run start a different
application.
0x2191
Exchange command not
possible because no
liquid handling station
available
The chosen application may not be run on Load the concerned application
on an other device, or
the selected device. Possible cause for this
error message:
delete Exchange commands in
the application.
The application has been written for another
device.
0x2201
Hardware error
X-axis motor: Home switch always on.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
X-axis motor: Steps lost.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Carrier: final position in
x always found
0x2207
Hardware error
Carrier: steps lost in x
0x220A
(SMOT_IOCTL_ERR)
X-axis motor: Unknown driver error code.
0x220B
(SMOT_BADPARAMS)
X-axis motor: error bad parameters.
0x220C
(SMOT_ALREADYONP X-axis motor: already in position.
OS)
0x2301
Hardware error
Y-axis motor: Home switch always on.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Y-axis motor: Steps lost.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Y-axis motor: Steps lost.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Y-axis motor: Home not found.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Y-axis motor: Home not found.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Home switch always on.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Home2 not found.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Home2 switch always on.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Wrong home switch.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Carrier: final position in
y always found
0x2307
Hardware error
Carrier: steps lost in y
0x230D
Hardware error
Carrier: steps lost in y
0x230E
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
y not found
0x230F
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
y not found
0x2401
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
z always found
0x2402
Hardware error
Carrier: final position 2
in z not found
0x2403
Hardware error
Carrier: final position 2
in z always found
0x2404
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
z wrong
150
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x2407
Hardware error
Z-axis motor: Steps lost.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Steps lost.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Home not found.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Home not found.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Communication error
during transmission to
Trinamic module
Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
Communication error
during reception from
Trinamic module
Hardware error
Carrier: steps lost in z
0x240D
Hardware error
Carrier: steps lost in z
0x240E
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
z not found
0x240F
Hardware error
7
Carrier: final position in
z not found
0x2F00
The communication with the Trinamic
module is failing.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x2F02
Checksum error during Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
reception from Trinamic The checksum from the Trinamic module is instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
module
failing.
Service
0x2F03
Communication error
during reception from
Trinamic module
Hardware error
The communication with the Trinamic
module is failing.
Troubleshooting
0x2F01
The communication with the Trinamic
module is failing.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x2F06
Mixer motor cannot find Hardware error
its home position
Mixer motor cannot find its home position
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x2F08
Clamping device cannot Hardware error
write to spi bus
Communication with clamping device is
failing.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x2F0A
Clamping device did not Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
reach operating current The gear belt of the clamping device may be instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
failing.
Service
0x2F0C
Clamping device limit
switch has wrong
position
Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3000
Temperature unit 1 in
location C1 reports an
invalid temperature
The temperature unit "TEMP1" in position
C1 is damaged and showed an invalid
temperature.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3001
Temperature unit 2 in
location C2 reports an
invalid temperature
The temperature unit "TEMP2" in position
C2 is damaged and showed an invalid
temperature.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
151
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Troubleshooting
7
152
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x3002
Temperature unit 3 in
location C3 reports an
invalid temperature
The temperature unit "TEMP3" in position
C3 is damaged and showed an invalid
temperature.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3003
The thermomixer
reports an invalid
temperature
The temperature unit of the thermomixer is
damaged and showed an invalid
temperature.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3004
Temperature unit 1 in
The temperature unit "TEMP1" in position
location C1 cannot heat C1 is damaged and do not heat.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3005
Temperature unit 2 in
The temperature unit "TEMP2" in position
location C2 cannot heat C2 is damaged and do not heat.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3006
Temperature unit 3 in
The temperature unit "TEMP3" in position
location C3 cannot heat C3 is damaged and do not heat.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3007
The thermomixer cannot The temperature unit of the thermomixer is
heat
damaged and do not heat.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3008
Temperature unit 1 in
The temperature unit "TEMP1" in position
location C1 cannot cool C1 is damaged and does not cool.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3009
Temperature unit 2 in
The temperature unit "TEMP2" in position
location C2 cannot cool C2 is damaged and does not cool.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x300A
Temperature unit 3 in
The temperature unit "TEMP3" in position
location C3 cannot cool C3 is damaged and does not cool.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x300B
The thermomixer cannot The temperature unit of the thermomixer is
cool
damaged and does not cool.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
8
8
Maintenance
Maintenance
8.1
Service
8.1.1
Replacing the sealing rings of the eight-channel dispensing tool
8
1
2
Sealing ring
2
Maintenance
1
Tip cone
Damage to the gold contacts from handling.
NOTICE!
The connection to the PCB of the dispensing tool is interfered with or interrupted if the gold
contacts on the dispensing tool are damaged or dirtied.
Do not touch the gold contacts.
Replace the sealing rings annually or as required.
Hint!
Use the auxiliary tool and the mounting aid included with the delivery of the dispensing tool.
Carry out the following steps to replace the sealing rings:
1. Attach the edge of the auxiliary tool at the level of the sealing ring.
2. Cut the sealing ring at the dispensing tool with the help of the auxiliary tool.
3. Remove the sealing ring by hand.
4. Clean the tip cones with a lightly moist and lint-free cloth.
5. Repeat the process for all other sealing rings and tip cones.
6. Attach the new sealing rings with the help of the mounting tool (shortened pipette tip) and
position the sealing rings in the recessed grooves of the tip cones.
8.1.2
Maintaining the dispensing tools
A lack of servicing will impair reliable dispensing.
NOTICE!
Servicing of the dispensing tools is essential after 200,000 full strokes. This is the only way to
ensure reliable dispensing.
Note the warning in the software reporting that 200,000 full strokes have been reached and
have the dispensing tools serviced.
Send the dispensing tool for maintenance to your service partner of Eppendorf AG.
153
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
8.2
Cleaning
8.2.1
Cleaning the worktable
Damage from UV radiation.
NOTICE!
Hint!
UV radiation can cause color changes to the surface or, in the course of time, cause damage to
the moving parts and electronics of the epMotion.
Avoid UV radiation.
If the worktable becomes contaminated during operation, remove such contamination as quickly
as possible.
1. Clean the worktable with a 70% ethanol solution or with hypochlorite-containing agents (3%)
and a lint-free cloth.
2. Clean the worktable in the area of the spring plate using a cotton bud if necessary.
8
3. Clean the reflectors on the inside of the cleanbench and the sensor covers using an ethanol
solution with a concentration of 70% and a lint-free cloth.
8.2.2
Cleaning the worktable base adapter
Maintenance
1. Clean the worktable base adapter with alcohol-containing disinfectants and a lint-free cloth.
Do not use any cleaning agents which contain sodium hypochlorite.
2. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
8.2.3
Cleaning the dispensing tools
1. Remove the ejector of the single-channel tools.
2. Clean the tip cones and surfaces with water or a 70% ethanol solution or with
hypochlorite-containing (3%) agents and a lint-free cloth.
3. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
8.2.4
Cleaning the thermoadapter, thermoblock and thermorack
1. Wipe down thermoadapter, thermoblock and thermorack with alcohol-containing disinfectant
or with Na hypochlorite (3 to 4%) and a lint-free cloth.
2. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
8.2.5
Autoclaving Labware
Autoclave the thermoadapter, thermoblock and thermorack for 20 minutes at 121°C and
1 bar pressure.
154
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
8.3
Decontamination before shipment
If you want to send the dispensing tool to be checked, repaired or calibrated by Eppendorf AG or
one of its service partners, please observe the following:
Hazardous substances are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
solutions presenting a hazard to health
potentially infectious agents
organic solvents and reagents
radioactive substances
proteins presenting a hazard to health
DNA
Follow the instructions in the decontamination certificate. These can be found as a PDF file
on our homepage www.eppendorf.de.
Decontaminate all the parts you want to dispatch.
Include the completed and signed decontamination certificate for returned goods with your
8
shipment (incl. the serial number of the dispensing tool).
Maintenance
155
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
9
9
Technical data
Technical data
Hint!
9.1
9.2
9
The following technical data apply exclusively to the automatic pipetting system epMotion. For
technical data on the PC and the keyboard please refer to the appropriate operating instructions.
Power supply
Voltage
100 to 240 V ±10%
Fuses
Type T 2.5 AH / 250 V
Current consumption
< 1.5 A
Frequency
50 Hz to 60 Hz ±5%
Power consumption
max. 80 W
Overvoltage category
II (IEC 610 10-1)
Degree of contamination:
2
Protection class
1
Ambient conditions
General operation
+15°C to +35°C
55% to 75% rel. humidity
Technical data
up to 2000 m NN
Storage conditions
-20°C to +70°C
10% to 80% rel. humidity
9.3
Weight/dimensions
9.3.1
Dimensions
Device
9.3.2
9.4
9.5
Width
65 cm
Depth
48 cm
Height
63 cm
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5070
without PC
33,1 kg
Interface
Specification
USB
USB 2.0
Ethernet
Ethernet 100 MBit/s
Weight
Interfaces
Dispensing Tools
Data for free-jet pipetting using double-distilled water. Data analysis in accordance with
ISO 8655.
156
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Temperature approx. 20 °C, standard air pressure.
9.5.1
Pipetting
Dispensing
tool
Volume range
TS 50
1.0 - 50 µL
TS 300
TS 1000
TM 50_8
TM 1000_8
40 - 1 000 µL
1.0 - 50 µL
20 - 300 µL
40 - 1 000 µL
Error
Limits for average values
systematic
(falsity)
random
(Imprecision)
Lower limit
Upper limit
1 µL
±20.0 %
±5.0 %
0.80 µL
1.20 µL
5 µL
±5.0 %
±3.0 %
4.75 µL
5.25 µL
25 µL
±1.5 %
±0.6 %
24.63 µL
25.38 µL
50 µL
±1.0 %
±0.4 %
49.50 µL
50.50 µL
20 µL
±4.0 %
±2.5 %
19.2 µL
20.8 µL
30 µL
±3.0 %
±1.5 %
29.1 µL
30.9 µL
150 µL
±1.0 %
±0.4 %
148.5 µL
151.5 µL
300 µL
±0.6 %
±0.3 %
298.2 µL
301.8 µL
40 µL
±5.0 %
±1.5 %
38.0 µL
42.0 µL
100 µL
±2.0 %
±1.0 %
98.0 µL
102.0 µL
500 µL
±1.0 %
±0.2 %
495.0 µL
505.0 µL
1 000 µL
±0.7 %
±0.15 %
993.0 µL
1007.0 µL
1 µL
±25.0 %
±10.0 %
0.75 µL
1.25 µL
5 µL
±5.0 %
±5.0 %
4.75 µL
5.25 µL
25 µL
±2.0 %
±1.2 %
24.50 µL
25.50 µL
50 µL
±1.2 %
±0.6 %
49.40 µL
50.60 µL
20 µL
±10.0 %
±4.0 %
18.0 µL
22.0 µL
30 µL
±10.0 %
±3.5 %
27.0 µL
33.0 µL
150 µL
±2.5 %
±0.8 %
146.3 µL
153.8 µL
300 µL
±1.5 %
±0.5 %
295.5 µL
304.5 µL
40 µL
±6.0 %
±2.5 %
37.6 µL
42.4 µL
100 µL
±3.0 %
±1.5 %
97.0 µL
103.0 µL
500 µL
±1.5 %
±0.3 %
492.5 µL
507.5 µL
1 000 µL
±0.8 %
±0.15 %
992.0 µL
1008.0 µL
9
Technical data
TM 300_8
20 - 300 µL
Volume
157
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
9.5.2
Dispsensing
Dispensing
tool
Volume range
TS 50
1.0 - 50 µL
Volume
1 µL
Error
Limits for average values
systematic
(falsity)
random
(Imprecision)
Lower limit
Upper limit
±5.0 %
±12.0 %
4.8 µL
5.3 µL
±3.0 %
±5.0 %
29.1 µL
30.9 µL
±2.0 %
±2.0 %
98.0 µL
102.0 µL
±7.5 %
±15.0 %
4.6 µL
5.4 µL
±5.5 %
±15.0 %
28.4 µL
31.7 µL
±1.0 %
±6.0 %
99.0 µL
101.0 µL
5 µL
25 µL
50 µL
TS 300
20 - 300 µL
20 µL
30 µL
150 µL
300 µL
TS 1000
40 - 1 000 µL
40 µL
100 µL
500 µL
1 000 µL
TM 50_8
1.0 - 50 µL
9
1 µL
5 µL
25 µL
50 µL
Technical data
TM 300_8
20 - 300 µL
20 µL
30 µL
150 µL
300 µL
TM 1000_8
40 - 1 000 µL
40 µL
100 µL
500 µL
1 000 µL
When dispensing the defined errors for pipetting are exceeded.
Hint!
9.6
Further specifications
9.6.1
Noise level
9.6.2
Noise level
typically 53 dB (A)
Optical confocal infrared sensor
Non-contact detection of liquid levels, tools
used, labware surfaces, types and quantities
of tips
Detection conditions
The liquid surface must be at 90 ± 3° in
relation to the optical beam axis.
Optical sensor
The liquid height must be at least 3 mm
158
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
9.6.3
Carrier
Working space
Width X
37 cm
Depth Y
20 cm
Height Z
20 cm
X-Y-Z axis positioning
9.6.4
Systematic error
±0.3 mm
Random error
±0.1 mm
Rack LC for LightCycler capillaries
Capacity
96 Roche LightCycler capillaries
(20 or 100 µL)
Weight
290 g
(210 g rack + 80 g filled capillaries 100 µL)
Height
• 36 mm = Rack LC
• 51 mm = Rack LC + capillaries (20 µL) with
9
seal
• 57 mm = Rack LC + capillaries (100 µL)
with seal
Max. speed:
700 x g centrifugation speed
Technical data
159
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
10
10
10
10.1
Ordering Information
Ordering Information
Ordering Information
Accessory
Hint!
10.1.1
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5070
Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
5070 000.719
960000200
10.1.2
Automated pipetting system epMotion CB with integrated PC
as 5070 000.700 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
Dispensing Tools
Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
5280 000.010
960001010
Single-channel dispensing tool TS 50
Volume range 1 - 50 µl
5280 000.037
960001028
Single-channel dispensing tool TS 300
Volume range 20 - 300 µl
5280 000.053
960001036
Single-channel dispensing tool TS 1 000
Volume range 40 - 1 000 µL
5280 000.215
960001044
Eight-channel-dispensing tool TM 50-8
Volume range 1 - 50 µL
5280 000.231
960001052
Eight-channel-dispensing tool TM 300-8
Volume range 20 - 300 µL
5280 000.258
960001061
Eight-channel-dispensing tool TM 1 000-8
Volume range 40 - 1 000 µL
5075 774.003
960001109
Holder for 6 dispensing tools
10.1.3
epT.I.P.S. Motion pipette tips.
Order No.
(International)
160
Use only original Eppendorf accessories or accessories (labware) approved by Eppendorf AG on
the epMotion.
Order No.
Description
(North America)
0030 014.405
0030 014.448
0030 014.480
epT.I.P.S. Motion
Eppendorf Quality, 10 racks of 96 tips
50 µL
300 µL
1 000 µL
0030 014.413
0030 014.456
0030 014.499
epT.I.P.S. Motion Filter
PCR clean, 10 racks of 96 tips
50 µL
300 µL
1 000 µL
0030 015.207
0030 015.223
0030 015.240
epT.I.P.S. Motion
Sterile, 10 racks of 96 tips
50 µL
300 µL
1 000 µL
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
10
Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
0030 014.421
0030 014.464
0030 014.502
epT.I.P.S. Motion Reloads
Eppendorf Quality, 12 x 2 trays of 96 tips
50 µL
300 µL
1 000 µL
0030 014.430
0030 014.472
0030 014.510
epT.I.P.S. Motion Filter Reloads
PCR clean, 12 x 2 trays of 96 tips
50 µL
300 µL
1 000 µL
5075 751.399
Tip Holder
For epT.I.P.S. Motion Reloads
10.1.4
Ordering Information
0030 015.215
0030 015.231
0030 015.258
epT.I.P.S. Motion Filter
PCR clean and sterile, 10 racks of 96 tips
50 µL
300 µL
1 000 µL
Reagent reservoirs
Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
5075 754.002
960002148
Reservoir Rack
For use with 30 mL and 100 mL reagent reservoirs
0030 126.505
0030 126.513
960051009
960051017
epMotion Reservoir
PCR clean, 10 x 5 pieces in bags
30 mL
100 mL
5075 751.364
90051017
Reservoir 400 mL
10 pieces
161
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
10
10.1.5
Racks for individual tubes
Ordering Information
Order No.
(International)
960002024
960002156
960002032
960002164
960002377
960002326
960002369
960002334
960002041
960002342
960002059
960002351
Rack
for 24 Eppendorf Tubes, glass or plastic tubes, no temperature control
Ø 17 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 17 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 16 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 16 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 15 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 15 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 14 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 14 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 13 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 13 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 12 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 12 mm x 60 mm max. length
5075 792.125
960002380
Rack
for 24 HPLC tubes
Ø 12 mm x 40 mm max. length
5075 791.005
960002318
Rack
for 96x 1.5/2.0 mL screw cap tubes
5075 761.009
5075 775.000
5075 760.002
5075 776.006
5075 792.028
5075 792.044
5075 792.001
5075 792.060
5075 762.005
5075 792.087
5075 763.001
5075 792.109
10.1.6
Modular rack components
Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
5075 799.049
5075 799.065
5075 799.081
5075 799.103
5075 799.120
5075 799.162
5075 799.189
5075 799.146
5075 799.260
960002601
960002611
960002620
960002630
960002640
960002650
960002660
960002670
960002680
10.1.7
RR Module TC
PCR 0.2 mL
PCR 0.5 mL
Safe Lock
Ø 12 mm
Ø 16 mm
Ø 17 mm
Ø 29 mm
Reservoir 30 mL
Reservoir 100 mL
Height Adapter
Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
5075 751.003
5075 752.000
960002105
960002113
Height adapter
85 mm
55 mm
960002121
Height adapter
for pipette tips
40 mm
5075 755.009
162
Order No.
Description
(North America)
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
10.1.8
10
Additional Accessories
Order No.
Description
(North America)
5075 001.250
960021044
Monitor
19" TFT monitor to be used with epMotion versions with integrated PC
5075 016.001
960000309
epBlue-epMotion PC Software
Software for epMotion Version with integrated PC, preinstalled
5075 753.006
960002016
Waste container
5075 751.054
960002391
Thermoadapter for Deep Well Plates, 96 wells
960002067
Thermorack for 24 Safe Lock tubes
temperature control
0.5 mL
5075 771.004
960002075
Rack for 24 Safe Lock tubes
temperature control
1.5/2.0 mL
5075 772.000
960002172
Adapter
for 25 Safe Lock tubes 0.5 mL
5070 752.001
5070752001
Worktable base adapter
To raise the epMotion worktable
4 feet
5070 751.005
5070751005
Extension plate
For supporting the work surface of the cleanbench
5075 769.000
10.1.9
Ordering Information
Order No.
(International)
Accessories for real-time PCR
Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
5075 790.009
960002520
Rack Smart
5075 795.000
960002511
Rack LC 20/100 µL
5075 751.305
5075751305
Thermoadapter LC Sample
For MagNA Pure LC sample cartridge
5075 767.031
960002500
Thermorack CB
100 µL
5075 787.008
960002199
Thermoadapter
for PCR 96 wells, skirted
5075 788.004
960002202
Thermoadapter
for PCR 384 wells, skirted
5075 789.000
960002300
Thermoadapter FROSTY
5075 766.000
960002083
Thermoblock for PCR 96 wells
5075 767.007
960002091
Thermoblock for PCR 384 wells
0030 126.530
960002288
CycleLock Starter Set
PCR clean, 1 frame and 8 mats for automatical locking of Eppendorf PCR plates
0030 126.548
960002296
0030 128.648
0030 128.672
951020401
951020460
CycleLock mats
PCR clean, 5 pieces
twin.tec PCR Plate 96
Wells colorless
skirted, colorless, 25 pcs.
skirted, blue, 25 pcs.
163
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
10
Ordering Information
Order No.
(International)
Order No.
Description
(North America)
951020427
951020443
951020486
twin.tec PCR Plate 96, skirted
Wells colorless, 25 pcs.
yellow
green
red
951020508
twin.tec PCR Plate 96, skirted
Wells black, 25 pcs.
yellow
951020702
951020737
twin.tec PCR Plate 384
Wells colorless
colorless, 25 pcs.
blue, 25 pcs.
0030 128.516
0030 128.524
0030 128.540
951020711
951020729
951020745
twin.tec PCR Plate 384
Wells colorless, 25 pcs.
yellow
green
red
3881 000.015
3881 000.023
3881 000.031
022510509
022510541
022510525
PCR-Cooler
Starter Set (1 x pink, 1 x blue)
Pink
Blue
0030 128.656
0030 128.664
0030 128.680
0030 128.800
0030 128.508
0030 128.532
All twin.tec plates can be obtained with barcoding on request.
Hint!
164
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
11
11
11.1
Transport, storage and disposal
Transport, storage and disposal
Shut down
Hint!
11
If you decommission the epMotion for a prolonged period of time, observe the storage conditions
(see Ambient conditions on p. 156).
Carry out the following tasks before decommissioning the epMotion:
Transport, storage and disposal
1. Clean the epMotion and decontaminate the components (see Cleaning on p. 154).
2. Only have the transport of the epMotion carried out by the service department of Eppendorf
AG or authorized service personnel.
11.2
Installation after transport
Abb. 1:
System connections between epMotion PC and epMotion
8
4
7
3
2
1
6
plugged
Ethernet
USB
USB
RS 232
RS 232
CAN
Control
Panel
unplugged
5
Fig. 1:
1
System connections between epMotion PC and epMotion
Control panel
2
CAN
For additional epMotion systems
3
RS 232
4
USB
5
Ethernet
6
PC power switch
8
DVI monitor connection
Connection between epMotion PC and
epMotion
7
USB
Connection for mouse and keyboard
DVI connection for PC display
165
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
11.3
Disposal
In case the product is to be disposed of, the relevant legal regulations are to be observed.
Information on the disposal of electrical and electronic devices in the European
Community:
11
Within the European Community, the disposal of electrical devices is regulated by national
regulations based on EU Directive 2002/96/EC pertaining to waste electrical and electronic
equipment (WEEE).
Transport, storage and disposal
According to these regulations, any devices supplied after August 13, 2005, in the
business-to-business sphere, to which this product is assigned, may no longer be disposed of in
municipal or domestic waste. To document this, they have been marked with the following
identification:
Because disposal regulations may differ from one country to another within the EU, please
contact your supplier if necessary.
In Germany, this is mandatory from March 23, 2006. From this date, the manufacturer has to offer
a suitable method of return for all devices supplied after August 13, 2005. For all devices supplied
before August 13, 2005, the last user is responsible for the correct disposal.
166
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
12
12
Appendix A: Hardware
Appendix A: Hardware
12.1
Labware
12.1.1
Introduction
Among other features, the software contains a large number of predefined consumables (tubes,
pipette tips, plates etc.), racks, holders and tools etc. You will find all labware names arranged in
specific subdirectories by labware type. These are explained in the following sections.
This is not a comprehensive description, as the range of labware is constantly being expanded.
More information on available labware components can be found in the product description of this
operating manual as well in the Internet at www.epMotion.com. All information subject to
change.
12
Information about the bottom tolerance and the remaining volume can be displayed via Open
labware (Home - create/edit labware tab) in the Labware Properties section.
Appendix A: Hardware
Abb. 1:
Product properties in "Open labware"
Fig. 1:
Product properties in "Open labware"
You can display additional product information for selected labware, such as the article name,
information about volumes, and order numbers, etc. To do so, click on Info in the file window or
mark the desired labware in Worktable mode.
Abb. 2:
Product properties in the file window (after you click on Info)
Fig. 2:
Product properties in the file window (after you click on Info)
167
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
The same information is displayed in the Labware list of the Work tab (e.g., after opening an
application) if a labware has been selected.
Abb. 3:
Product information in Worktable mode
Fig. 3:
Product information in Worktable mode
Appendix A: Hardware
12
12.1.2
Overview of labware
12.1.2.1 epT.I.P.S. Motion
Abb. 2:
Fig. 2:
1000 µL
Abb. 3:
300 µL
Fig. 3:
300 µL
Abb. 4:
50 µL
Fig. 4:
50 µL
1000 µL
epT.I.P.S. Motion are single-use tips and are intended exclusively for dispensing tools belonging
to the epMotion family of devices. The tips are available in three volume sizes to suit the volume
of the dispensing tools (50 µL, 300 µL and 1000 µL), in each case with or without filter.
The Tips labware folder contains the selection of epT.I.P.S Motion pipette tips.
Name in labware folder
Product name
tips1000
epT.I.P.S. Motion 1000 µL
tips1000f
epT.I.P.S. Motion 1000 µL, filter
tip300
epT.I.P.S. Motion 300 µL
tip300f
epT.I.P.S. Motion 300 µL, filter
tip50
epT.I.P.S. Motion 50 µL
tip50f
epT.I.P.S. Motion 50 µL, filter
Tips and racks are made of polypropylene (PP). The filter of the filter tips is made of polyethylene
(PE).
168
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Positioning fault as a result of incorrect tip handling.
Use tips only once.
Do not autoclave tips. If purity conditions demand it, use filter tips of the PCR clean
NOTICE!
specification.
Do not stack tip racks.
The coding on the tray informs the optical sensor about the volume of the tips and about whether
or not these are tips with filters. As the coding is only on one side of the tray, the correct
positioning of the rack on the worktable is important. Position the racks on the worktable so that
the labeling of the rack or Tip Holder and the recess on the tray are facing toward you.
12
The optical sensor detects any supply of tips still available within a rack, i.e. tips in racks which
have been started can continue to be used for subsequent methods. A prerequisite for this is that
the tips in the rack are in contiguous positions.
Appendix A: Hardware
Faults as a result of tips missing from the rack.
The optical sensor detects only the initial and final position of tips in a rack. Missing tips removed
from the center of a column by hand are not detected and will lead to faults in executing the
method.
NOTICE!
Do not remove by hand any tips within an enclosed area on the rack.
A column in a tip rack which has been started and which has been created by use of a
single-channel dispensing tool is detected by the software if you switch to a multi-channel
dispensing tool and is not used. Tips from this started column will not be picked up until a
single-channel dispensing tool is being used again later.
If you use an eight-channel dispensing tool, it will accordingly not use columns which have been
started. In the case of multi-channel mode, eight tips are always picked up simultaneously.
If the optical sensor is switched off, the tips must be placed in the rack starting with coordinate
A1. Columns must be complete.
12.1.2.5 Racks, thermoracks, thermoblock and thermoadapter
Racks are tube holders which can hold up to 24 tubes of a type. They are supplied primarily for
tubes larger than 2 mL.
Tubes with a capacity of 2 mL and below are positioned in thermoracks.
A special type is the "two-location rack". This rack can hold 96 tubes of approx. 2 mL.
Restrictions
Rack
Thermorack
Thermoblock
Thermoadapter
The combination of a rack with a tube type occurs in the labware file window in the Equip
Racks + Modules with Tubes directory.
The combination of a rack with a tube type occurs in the Equip Racks + Modules with Tubes
directory.
The combination of a thermoblocks with a skirted, semi-skirted or unskirted PCR plate is
specified in the software. No configuration or change possible.
Thermoadapters are available for 96-well and 384-well PCR plates as well as for the Deepwell
plates 96. When supplying the worktable, you can place a plate on the thermoadapter in a similar
way to putting labware on a height adapter. In contrast to the thermoblock, the thermoadapter
and plate do not form a fixed combination. The thermoadapter and the thermoblock differ in
visual terms by their different web lengths. The thermoblock also has cutouts with which the
gripper of the epMotion 5075 can engage.
Racks and thermoracks can be combined with tubes by users with level 2 rights or administrator
rights.
169
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Racks for reagent tubes
Abb. 6:
Rack for 24 reagent tubes
Fig. 6:
Rack for 24 reagent tubes
The appropriate racks are available as tube holders for reagent tubes with diameters of 12 to
17 mm. The basic area of the racks corresponds to that of a microplate, i.e. they can be placed at
any location on the worktable. The locations on a rack are numbered from 1 to 24. The rack is
available in two different heights.
12
Appendix A: Hardware
The optical sensor can use the coding of the racks to check that they are correctly aligned. The
software issues an error message if the rack is inserted the wrong way round.
Tubes and racks may not exceed a total height of approx. 123 mm. The maximum immersion
depth of the 300 µL and 500 µL tips is correspondingly less than that of the longer 1000 µL tips.
The administrator determines which tube can be used with which rack and is consequently
available as a combination in the software.
Rack LC for LightCycler capillaries
The Rack LC is a tube holder for automatically filling LightCycler capillaries. It can hold 96
capillaries with a capacity of 20 µL or 96 capillaries with a capacity of 100 µL. The bores for both
sizes of capillary are arranged in an alternating pattern.
In the software you will find the Rack LC under Plates\Tube Plates.
Abb. 7:
Rack LC 20 µL
Fig. 7:
Rack LC 20 µL
Abb. 8:
Rack LC 100 µL
Fig. 8:
Rack LC 100 µL
Using the Rack LC
1. Position the Rack LC on the worktable with its label on the front.
2. Select the labware for filling the capillaries from the Labware Tube Plates list.
3. Supply the Rack LC with only one capillary size per method run.
Rack 96 (Two Location Rack)
The rack is for the absorption of cryo tubes without lid (diameter similar to Safe-Lock tubes 1.5 or
2 mL). To be able to take 96 tubes, this special rack occupies two locations.
170
Abb. 9:
Rack 96 (Two Location Rack)
Fig. 9:
Rack 96 (Two Location Rack)
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
CAUTION!
Risk of crashing if only one location occupied by Rack 96!
When editing the worktable for the rack 96 always occupy two Locations a rear and a front
location (e.g., A2 and B2).
Define the same detection variant of the optical sensor for both locations.
After the start of a method, also always make identical changes and entries for both locations
of Rack 96 in the start worktable.
Do not use any tubes with lid.
12
Hint!
Using Rack 96
1. Select Rack 96 in the labware folder Equip Racks + Modules with Tubes under the name
Rack96_1_5 – 2_0.
Appendix A: Hardware
2. Proceed as for supplying the 96-well thermorack when supplying this rack with tubes with an
attached lid (Safe-Lock type tube). The position numbering of Rack 96 is rotated by 90°
compared to a 96-well plate.
3. When supplying the worktable, place Rack 96 on the pins of the two locations. In the process,
the opening in the bottom tray of Rack 96 must point towards the front.
Thermoracks and thermoracks TMX
For smaller tubes (e.g., Eppendorf Safe-Lock tube for 1.5 mL or 2 mL) a Thermorack/
Thermorack TMX which can be temperature-controlled with lid holder and 24 positions is
available. The tube lids are held vertically in the holder to the right of the tube bore.
With the aid of 24 adapter sleeves you can also insert into the Thermorack/Thermorack TMX
Safe-Lock tubes with a volume of 0.5 mL. The Thermorack/Thermorack TMX for the use with
0.5 mL tubes is also available with inserted adapter sleeves.
Damage to the device from placing the thermorack on the thermomixer!
CAUTION!
The thermorack is not suitable for application in the thermomixer. Using it in the thermomixer may
result in damage to the device and dispensing errors.
Do not place the thermorack onto the thermomixer!
Only use the thermorack TMX on the thermomixer.
Abb. 10:
Thermorack
Fig. 10:
Thermorack
The thermorack has a high heat capacity and retains the temperature away from the
temperature-control over a longer time period. It has a slower heat transfer as the Thermorack
TMX, i.e. it takes a bit longer to reach the desired temperature. Therefore the thermorack can
also be applied for temperature-control on the epMotion without active temperature-control.
171
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Abb. 11:
Thermorack TMX
Fig. 11:
Thermorack TMX
The Thermorack TMX is optimized for the application in the thermomixer as it is easier than the
normal thermoracks and therefore permits higher rotational speed during mixing. It has a quick
heat transfer and thus reaches the desired temperature quickly. The Thermorack TMX has a
lower heat capacity as opposed to the normal thermorack and does not retain the temperature
constant for a long time outside an active temperature-control. Therefore the Thermorack TMX is
above all suitable for the application on a epMotion with thermo unit and/or thermomixer.
Appendix A: Hardware
12
Thermoblocks and Thermoracks (96 Wells)
The thermoblock shown is available for 96-well PCR plates (e.g., Eppendorf twin.tec semi-skirted
or skirted).
Abb. 12:
Thermoblock/Thermorack
Fig. 12:
Thermoblock/Thermorack
Skirted 96-well PCR plates can optionally be positioned in a location on the worktable with a
96-well thermoblock, a 96-well thermoadapter or solo if the administrator has defined them as a
labware combination in the software.
Unskirted or semi-skirted 96-well PCR plates can only be positioned in a location on the
worktable in conjunction with the 96-well thermoblock or 96-well thermoadapter.
The combination of Thermoblock and other PCR plates cannot be performed by the
administrator, only by Eppendorf. Fixed combinations are predefined in the software for a variety
of plates, e.g., for twin.tec plates.
Special case Thermorack and 0.2 mL tubes
If the thermoblock is to be equipped with 0.2 mL PCR tubes then the thermoblock turns into a
thermorack in the software. The combination of a 0.2 mL tube with the thermorack does not have
to be predefined in the Labware directory at the factory, it can be effected by the administrator in
the Equip Racks + Modules with Tubes labware folder.
Risk of collision as a result of projecting tube lids!
NOTICE!
Carrier travel is optimized in the z direction. As a result, the tube lids may not point upwards. They
could otherwise be contacted by the tips which could lose liquid in the process.
Position 0.2 mL individual tubes and 8-tube strips so that their tube lids do not obstruct the
path of travel or dispensing steps of the dispensing tool.
172
Abb. 13:
Tube lid rotated by 45° in relation to the surface of the thermoblock
Fig. 13:
Tube lid rotated by 45° in relation to the surface of the thermoblock
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Use of the thermorack with 0.2 mL tubes
1. The best arrangement for the tubes is in columns, leaving every other column free for the
tube lids. Therefore you can position maximum 48 tubes in the thermoblock (see image).
2. Specify the assignment in the transport pattern when programming the method. Supply at the
start must correspond to the pattern.
Thermoblock (384 wells)
A special 384-well thermoblock is available for PCR plates with 384 wells.
Abb. 14:
Thermoblock (384 wells)
12
Fig. 14:
Thermoblock (384 wells)
Appendix A: Hardware
Regarding the use of the 384 PCR plates with thermoblock a fixed combination is available in the
software just as with the 96-well PCR plates with thermoblock.
Thermoadapter
Abb. 15:
Thermoadapter DWP 96
Fig. 15:
Thermoadapter DWP 96
Thermoadapters can be positioned in a location with or without a plate at the start of the method.
The thermoadapter forms a temporary combination with a plate. The combination is formed when
the worktable is edited. In terms of their combination options, thermoadapters are similar to
height adapters. A semi-skirted or unskirted PCR plate can only be used on the epMotion in
combination with a thermoadapter or thermoblock.
When viewed from above, PCR thermoadapters look very similar to thermoblocks. However, they
can be distinguished from one another from the side by the differing lengths of their webs.
Abb. 16:
Thermoblocks and thermoadapters
Thermoblock
Fig. 16:
PCR
384
Thermoadapter
PCR 384
Thermoblocks and thermoadapters
Thermoadapter LC Sample
The Thermoadapter LC Sample is a tube holder for the automated filling of MagNa Pure LC
Sample Cartridges. The adapter and the cartridge form a fixed combination and cannot be
transported with the gripper. The adapter can be temperature controlled up to 70°C. In the
software you can find the Thermoadapter LC Sample+Cartridge under Thermoblocks with plates.
Abb. 17:
Thermoadapter LC Sample
Fig. 17:
Thermoadapter LC Sample
173
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Cooling effect of thermoracks and thermoblocks
The PCR racks are cooled by being stored in the refrigerator (passive cooling).
For the continued temperature curve, the following values apply as a guide.
12
Thermorack or
Thermoblock
Plate or Tubes Used
Filling Volume per
Well or Tube
Time taken to heat
from 0°C to 10°C
R 1.5 / 2 mL
1.5 mL Safe-Lock
1000 µL
~ 30 min.
PCR 96
twin.tec 96-well PCR
plate
150 µL
~ 14 min.
PCR 384
twin.tec 384-well PCR 25 µL
plate
~ 10 min.
Appendix A: Hardware
12.1.2.18Reservoirs and reservoir rack
To supply liquids, reservoirs in sizes 30 mL and 100 mL are available. Up to seven reservoirs are
placed in a reservoir rack to position them on the worktable.
Abb. 19:
Reservoir rack
Fig. 19:
Reservoir rack
Abb. 21:
30 mL reservoir
Fig. 21:
30 mL reservoir
Abb. 20:
100 mL reservoir
Fig. 20:
100 mL reservoir
The reservoirs are optimized for eight-channel mode:
• The 100 mL reservoir is recommended for 1000 µL tips.
• The 30 mL reservoir is suitable for all tip sizes.
• In conjunction with the eight-channel dispensing tool, 50 µL and 300 µL tips cannot reach the
bottom of a 100 mL reservoir.
Some combinations of reservoirs in the reservoir rack are already predefined in the software. As
administrator, you can furthermore define new combinations of reservoirs and reservoir racks.
For larger volumes, an autoclavable reservoir with a capacity of 400 mL is available. The
remaining volume with these reservoirs is approx. 10 mL. The reservoir is made of polypropylene
(PP).
174
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Abb. 22:
400 mL reservoir (Eppendorf)
Fig. 22:
400 mL reservoir (Eppendorf)
12
12.1.2.23Reservoir rack with module racks
You can insert up to seven different module racks supplied with tubes in the reservoir rack.
Abb. 24:
Appendix A: Hardware
Tubes can be placed in the reservoir rack when they are in module racks and reservoirs with
holders which can be temperature-controlled. Uniform tubes of the same type must be used
within a module rack. The reservoir rack can be supplied in any sequence.
Supplied reservoir rack
1
2
3
4
Fig. 24:
Supplied reservoir rack
1
Reservoirs
2
Module racks
3
Locations in reservoir rack
4
Reservoir rack
You can use the following TC (temperature-controlled) module racks:
175
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Item Designation
No.
12
Labware name for software
1
RR Module TC Ø 29 mm
Module TC 29mm
2
RR Module TC Ø 17 mm
Module TC 17mm
3
RR Module TC Ø 100 mL
Module TC Reserv100 mL
4
RR Module TC Reservoir 30 mL
Module TC Reserv30ml
5
RR Module TC Ø 16 mm
Module TC 16mm
6
RR Module TC Ø 12 mm
Module TC 12mm
7
RR Module TC Safe Lock
Module TC Safe Lock (for 2 mL and 1.5 mL
Safe-Lock tubes) and
Appendix A: Hardware
Module TC Safe Lock 0.5ml (for 0.5 mL
Safe-Lock tubes) (use with adapter)
8
RR Module TC PCR 0.5 mL
Module TC PCR0_5ml
9
RR Module TC PCR 0.2 mL
Module TC PCR0_2ml
Insert the module racks square in the rack with the coding facing backwards.
Material damage as a result of incorrect positioning of module racks.
NOTICE!
If the module racks have been put in the reservoir rack with the code facing forwards, there is a
risk of collision and faulty dispensing.
Ensure that all module racks are inserted correctly.
If you use the 30 mL and 100 mL reservoirs with holders which can be temperature-controlled
they must be fastened by two connecting webs on each module rack.
1
Adjusting pin in the depositing
position
3
Connecting web
2
Adjusting pin (here height adjustment
50 mm)
Bores in the module racks with diameters 12, 16 and 17 mm and two pins enable tubes of five
different heights (50, 60, 70, 80, 90 mm) to be positioned. Both pins must be inserted on both
sides at the desired height, even if not all the positions are occupied by tubes. The module racks
with the diameters 17 and 29 mm occupy two positions in the reservoir rack.
The supplied reservoir racks can be positioned in any location with the exception of the A
locations.
176
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
If you are using the reservoir rack with module racks and reservoirs in your method, you can only
use irregular patterns. Exception: the reservoir rack is occupied throughout with identically
loaded module racks or reservoirs. In this case, the pattern with automatic pattern detection and
the standard pattern (in the case of sample transfer) can also be used.
Level detection can only be switched on or off for the entire reservoir rack. If you use supplied
module racks next to one another which contain volume ranges which the optical sensor is
unable to read (e.g., PCR tubes 0.2 mL and 0.5 mL), you will have to work with volume input.
Material damage as a result of the gripper colliding with the module rack.
Ensure that module rack and tubes do not exceed a height of 123 mm.
12
NOTICE!
Possible module rack supply
Rack
Tube (labware name)
Manufacturer
RR Module TC Ø 12 mm
BD_Tube_5ml_1
BD Biosciences
CHA_Tube_6_2ml
Chase
GR_Tube_5ml
Greiner
SAR_Tube_4_5ml
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_5000
Sarstedt
BD_Tube_11ml
BD Biosciences
BD_Tube_12ml
BD Biosciences
BS_Tube_13ml
Bibby Sterilin
Gr_Tube_11ml
Greiner
SAR_Tube_10ml
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_11ml
Sarstedt
QSP_Tube_11_5ml
QSP
USP_Tube_10ml
USA Scientific plastic
BD_Tube_14ml
BD Biosciences
GR_Tube_14ml
Greiner
GR_Tube_15ml
Greiner
SAR_Tube_11ml_1
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_14ml_3
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_14ml_2
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_14_5ml
Sarstedt
Roth_Tube_54ml
Roth
RR Module TC Ø 16 mm
RR Module TC Ø 17 mm
RR Module TC Ø 29 mm
Appendix A: Hardware
The following list contains possible arrangements of module racks with predefined tubes:
177
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Temperature-controlling the module racks
The following values are intended as guide values for temperature-controlling module racks.
Temperature change
Temperature change
from 23°C to 4°C
from 23°C to 37°C
Tube
Set
Temperatur
temperature e-control
time
Set
Temperatur
temperature e-control
time
RR Module TC PCR 0.2 mL or
PCR Tube 0.2 mL
3°C
RR Module TC PCR 0.5 mL
PCR Tube 0.5 mL
Module Rack
3x
12
38°C
approx.
8 min.
approx.
20 min.
38°C
approx.
12 min.
approx.
30 min.
38°C
approx.
17 min.
3°C
approx.
39 min.
39°C
approx.
23 min.
1°C
approx.
21 min.
39°C
approx.
15 min.
1°C
approx.
46 min.
40°C
approx.
28 min.
Safe Lock 0.5 mL
3°C
Safe Lock 1.5 mL
2°C
Safe Lock 2.0 mL
3°C
RR Module TC Ø 12 mm or
Tube Ø 12 mm
3°C
RR Module TC Ø 16 mm or
Tube Ø 16 mm
3°C
Falcon Tube 15 mL
2°C
3x
Appendix A: Hardware
approx.
15 min.
RR Module TC Safe Lock
3x
2x
RR Module TC Ø 17 mm
2x
RR Module TC Ø 29 mm
Falcon Tube 50 mL
1x
RR Module TC Reservoir 30 mL
Reservoir 30 mL
1x
RR Module TC Ø 100 mL
Reservoir 100 mL
12.1.2.25Height Adapter
In order to keep transfer times and distances as short as possible for the carrier, there are various
height adapters which can be used to compensate for plates of differing heights.
Height Adapter and plate may not exceed a total height of 123 mm. Combinations taller than
123 mm are rejected with an error message during configuration of the worktable.
For this reason, racks and reservoir holders may not be placed on height adapters.
Abb. 26:
Height Adapter
Fig. 26:
Height Adapter
The adapters are marked with the height in question. The following heights are available.
178
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
40 mm: This adapter is suitable for use with 50 µL and 300 µL tips, for example. Labware which
fits on taller height adapters can likewise be positioned here.
55 mm: This adapter is suitable for deepwell plates, 300 mL reservoirs, semi-skirted or unskirted
PCR plates in a thermoblock and for some skirted PCR plates in a thermoblock, for example.
85 mm: This adapter is suitable for almost all microplates from 6 to 384 wells as well as almost all
PCR plates with 96 or 384 wells. The Eppendorf PCR plate twin.tec (skirted, 96 or 384 wells) can
be inserted with a thermoblock at this height.
Thermoadapter Frosty
The Frosty thermoadapter is a special type. It is particularly suitable for users who have used the
Eppendorf PCR Cooler during manual PCR setup and who wish to continue using this form of
cooling. To do so, the cooling unit of the PCR Cooler is placed in a modified height adapter and a
skirted PCR plate (e.g., a 96-well twin.tec PCR plate) positioned on that. Other PCR plates
cannot be used. It is not possible to supply the cooling unit with 0.2 mL PCR tubes when using in
the epMotion.
Modified height adapter and cooling unit or "Frosty Thermoadapter"
Fig. 27:
Modified height adapter and cooling unit or "Frosty Thermoadapter"
Appendix A: Hardware
Abb. 27:
12
The cooling unit does not affect the overall height of height adapter and skirted PCR plate.
Note on editing the method: when editing the worktable for the Frosty Thermoadapter
(Adap_frosty), only select a skirted PCR plate for the location. The cooling unit to be used is not
named in the software.
Notes on the cooling unit.
• The unit should be deep-frozen with the underside of the unit facing upwards.
• The cooling unit then displays the overshooting of a temperature of 7°C by changing color
from purple to pink or from dark blue to light blue. A key factor in cooling samples is the color
value in the depressions in the cooling unit.
• The cooling action of the cooling unit is comparable to manual use of the PCR Cooler.
12.1.2.28Plates
Files are available for the following labware:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microplates (MTP) with different numbers of wells
Deepwell plates (DWP) with different numbers of wells
Skirted PCR plates with different numbers of wells
Filter plates
Tube plates with 96 individual tubes
Rack for microtubes in a 96-well grid
179
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
The plates described here can be positioned straight onto the surface of the worktable at a
location. The prerequisite for this is that the plates in question have been activated in the software
(see Activate or deactivate labware on p. 84).
Appendix A: Hardware
12
Abb. 29:
Microplate (MTP) with 96 wells
Fig. 29:
Microplate (MTP) with 96 wells
Abb. 31:
Deepwell plate (DWP) with 96 wells
Fig. 31:
Deepwell plate (DWP) with 96 wells
Abb. 30:
Microplate (MTP) with 24 wells
Fig. 30:
Microplate (MTP) with 24 wells
Plates and racks must be inserted at right-angles to the base.
Hint!
In the Plates labware folder you will find a large selection of various plates. These are arranged in
specific subfolders by plate type:
180
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Tab. 1:
MTP 96
Microplates, 96 wells
MTP 384
Microplates, 384 wells
MTP 24 + DWP 24
Microplates and deepwell plates, 24 wells
MTP 6
Microplate, 6 wells
PCR 96
PCR plates, 96 wells
PCR 384
PCR plates, 384 wells
DWP 96
Deepwell plates, 96 wells
DWP 384
Deepwell plates, 384 wells
Filter Plates 96
Filter plates, 96 wells
Filter Plates 384
Filter plates, 384 wells
Tube Plates 96
Plates with up to 96 individually removable tubes
12
Appendix A: Hardware
12.1.3
Plates labware folder
Abbreviations used
Each labware Name includes information about the manufacturer and labware type, e.g.,
EP_pDNA_384_MTP_1 (EP = Eppendorf, pDNA_384 = Collection Plate for PerfectPrep Plasmid
384 Kit, MTP = micro test plate). If no manufacturer abbreviation is used, it is an Eppendorf item.
In the following sections you will find explanations of the abbreviations used.
12.1.3.1 Manufacturer
Abbreviation
Manufacturer
AB
Abgene
AXYG
Axygen Scientific
ABI
Applied Biosystems
BD
BD Biosciences
BRAN
BRAND
BS
Barloworld Scientific
CO
Corning/Costar
ELK
Elkay
EP
Eppendorf AG
FALC
Falcon
GENE
Genetix
GR
Greiner
IWA
Iwaki
LAMB
One Lambda
MAT
Matrix
MI
Millipore
MJ
MJ Research
MN
Macherey+Nagel
NUNC
Nunc/Nalgene
PACK
Packard
181
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Appendix A: Hardware
12
Abbreviation
Manufacturer
PALL
Pall
POR
Porex
PR
Promega
ROB
Robbins
QIA
Qiagen
SAR
Sarstedt
SCI
Scientific
TPP
TPP
USP
USA Scientific
WHAT
Whatman
12.1.3.2 Other abbreviations in labware names
12.1.4
Abbreviation
Description
DWP
Deepwell plate (DWP) with 24, 96 or 384 wells
FP
Filter plate
MTP
Micro test plate with 6, 24 ... 96, 384 wells
PCR
Plate for PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction)
TP
Tube plate (plate with individually removable tubes)
Cleanup
Plate is included in the PCR Cleanup Kit
DNA/RNA
Plate is included in the kit for purification/isolation
TT
Eppendorf twin.tec
PCR Plate
Thermo
Fixed combination of thermoblock and PCR plate
Numbers
For example _5ml_ or _200_ = maximum filling volume (each tube or well)
in mL or µL.
Labware definitions
The following folders are present for labware and labware combinations:
Labware folder/
Contents
Description
Tips
Pipette tips
(see p. 168)
Plates
Various subfolders for plates (e.g., MTP 96,
Tube Plates)
(see p. 179)
Equip Racks + Modules Combinations of racks, thermoracks and tubes (Fig. 7 on
with Tubes
and Safe-Lock tubes and for supplying module p. 170)and(see p. 175
racks
)
182
Equip Holder with Tubs For reservoirs, supplied module racks and the
+ Modules
reservoir rack
(see p. 175)and(see p
. 177)
Adapters
(see p. 178)and(see p
. 173)
Height adapters and thermoadapters
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
12.1.5
Labware folder/
Contents
Description
Thermoblocks with
plates
Fixed combinations of skirted PCR plates (in
(see p. 172)
which passive temperature-control of the
thermoblock is to be used) and semi-skirted or
unskirted PCR plates (which cannot be placed
in a location without an adapter). In these
cases, the thermoblock functions as an
adapter and if required, for
temperature-control.
Tubs
Reservoirs with a capacity of 400 mL or
300 mL which can be positioned in a location
without an additional holder
(see p. 174)
12
Compile your own labware combinations
Appendix A: Hardware
The labware combinations are summarized in the labware file window in folders. You can activate
or deactivate labware in the folders.
You can also create your own labware combinations from the components that are available
(e.g., rack-tube combinations), or delete them using the icon or the Delete popup menu.
When editing a method, activated labware combinations as well as activated labware are
displayed in a list.
12.1.5.1 Folder for labware and labware combinations and liquids
Hint!
Beyond the preconfigured standard labware available ex works, it is also possible to dimension
individual or external labware for use with the epMotion 5070 CB and to incorporate it in the
labware directories of the software. For more information on this, contact Eppendorf Service.
12.1.5.2 Request labware definition
You can find more than 350 labware files for downloading at www.epMotion.com.
Hint!
If tubes or plates you require are not yet defined in the software, send the appropriate request to
the following address:
Eppendorf AG
Application Support:
Phone: +49 180 366 67 89
E-mail: [email protected]
Fax +49 538 01 556 or +49 539 901 25
183
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
12.2
Tools (dispensing tools)
Dispensing tools are piston-stroke pipettes working on the air-cushion principle. If the piston in
the dispensing tool moves up, liquid can be aspirated into the tip. Piston movements in a
downward direction dispense the liquid. The piston movement is effected by a stepper motor in
the carrier, in all 8 channels simultaneously in multi-channel tools.
Abb. 3:
Single channel dispensing tool TS 50, volume range 1-50 µL
Abb. 4:
12
Eight channel dispensing tool TM 50-8, volume range 1-50 µL
Appendix A: Hardware
50
Fig. 3:
Single channel dispensing tool
TS 50, volume range 1-50 µL
Abb. 5:
Single channel dispensing tool TS 300, volume range 20-300 µL
Fig. 4:
Eight channel dispensing tool
TM 50-8, volume range 1-50 µL
Abb. 6:
Eight channel dispensing tool TM 300-8, volume range 20-300 µL
300
Fig. 5:
Single channel dispensing tool
TS 300, volume range 20-300 µL
Abb. 7:
Single channel dispensing tool TS 1000, volume range 40-1000 µL
Fig. 6:
Eight channel dispensing tool
TM 300-8, volume range 20-300 µL
Abb. 8:
Eight channel dispensing tool TM 1000-8, volume range 40-1000 µL
1000
Fig. 7:
Fig. 8:
Single channel dispensing tool
TS 1000, volume range 40-1000 µL
Eight channel dispensing tool
TM 1000-8, volume range 40-1000
µL
More information about tools can be found in the product description of this operating manual
(see Dispensing tools (tools) on p. 15).
Following the start of a method, all the subsequent steps run fully automatically.
• If required, the Optical Sensor checks the correct selection, positioning and filling level of
tubes and the supply of tips in Tip Racks.
• The correct dispensing tool is detected by the code in the tool.
• Depending on the dispensing tool, one or eight pipette tips are picked up.
• If the further procedure has been defined in the method by supply of the worktable and in the
procedure by commands, the carrier moves the dispensing tool to the source location. The
required liquid is aspirated. The carrier then moves the dispensing tool to the first destination
location.
184
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Furthermore
• Water can be pipetted from 1 µL and multidispensed from 3 µL.
An undershooting of the recommended dispensing volumes is possible but it is your own
responsibility. Ensure that in this case the dispensing for your application is sufficient.
Hint!
• Depending on the method, other destination positions are possible. The dispensing or
transport pattern is likewise specified within the command.
•
•
•
•
•
Optical sensor
12.3.1
Function
The time of the pipette tip change can likewise be programmed.
12
Liquid can likewise be mixed in the pipette tip before aspiration and after dispensing.
Optimum dispensing parameters are achieved by selecting a liquid type in the commands.
If other commands in a method require different dispensing tools, the change in dispensing
tool which will have to be performed by the user is shown in the display in the started method.
Appendix A: Hardware
12.3
The number of samples can be entered at the start or specified with priority in the method.
The optical sensor (U.S. Pat. No. 6,819,437) is used, among other things, for detecting the filling
level of tubes. If you are working in a method with defined and constant volumes and you specify
these when editing the method, filling level detection can be dispensed with. On MTPs with 384
wells and 0.2 and 0.5 mL tubes, it is not possible to measure liquid. Liquid measurement is not
recommended for MTPs with 96 wells.
Principle
Detector
Diaphragm
Diaphragm
Light source
Semi-transparent
mirror
Z
Imaging optics
Z0
The reflection of light is detected by a receiver with the aid of a lateral light source, a
semi-transparent mirror, a lens and motion in the z direction in the desired position; the software
then evaluates the maximum. The reflections of light provide information about surfaces and
liquid level. Detection operations can be performed using the reflections of light.
Use the Functions tab to define a default setting for the optical sensor:
• Liquid detection (detection of liquid surfaces) (see p. 186)
• Tips (tip detection) (see p. 188)
• Locations (detection of location occupation) (see p. 189)
185
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Abb. 1:
Default setting of the optical sensor via the Functions tab
Fig. 1:
Default setting of the optical sensor via the Functions tab
Double-click on the labware on the worktable to show the detection variants. In Worktable mode
you can switch scanning of liquid surfaces on or off for any marked labware:
Appendix A: Hardware
12
Abb. 2:
Detection variants in Worktable mode
Fig. 2:
Detection variants in Worktable mode
To switch scanning on or off for a specific run for all locations, activate the corresponding option
immediately after starting the method.
Abb. 3:
Adjusting the optical sensor after starting the method
Fig. 3:
Adjusting the optical sensor after starting the method
If the filling volumes of the tubes are easy to detect in the method to be started, you can reduce
processing time by switching off the optical sensor and entering volume manually. If destination
tubes are empty, it is quicker to enter a volume "0" than to scan with the optical sensor. Filling
volumes which are known should be defined when you edit the method.
If the optical sensor is switched off, a display for entering filling volume is automatically faded in
as the method continues.
12.3.2
Detection version 1: detecting liquid surfaces
Level Detection applies generally for Liquid Detection in all labware. You switch Level Detection
on or off when you start a method.
If Levels is activated, the surface of the liquid is scanned in the case of labware for which Liquid
Detection is set to All positions. If Levels deactivated, there is no detection of liquid surfaces (liquid
detection).
186
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Liquid Detection relates to the labware. Liquid Detection switches the optical sensor for detecting
the surfaces of liquids on or off. When detecting the surface of a liquid, the optical sensor can
only detect approximately horizontal (plane) surfaces. The surface must be at 90° ± 3° in
relation to the optical beam axis. If the curvature of the surface is too extreme as a result of the
physical properties of the liquid, tube or tube geometry, the optical sensor can no longer detect
the liquid level. In this case, the user must enter the volume.
It is not possible to detect filling levels in 384-well plates; it is recommended to only a limited
extent for 96-well plates to minimize the time required. Where Number of Samples ≤10, only Off
and All Positions are displayed for selection.
12.3.2.1 Liquid Detection selection options
12
Off
If you set the optical sensor to Off, 24 individual volumes can already be defined for a 24-tube
rack when editing, for example:
Liquid Detection in Worktable mode
Fig. 2:
Liquid Detection in Worktable mode
Appendix A: Hardware
Abb. 2:
If you start with the volume entry in the first row, the volume will be adopted for all positions
automatically. To do this, mark the Volume column and then click in another field. One correction
per row is then possible.
For locations in which the optical sensor is switched off, the required volume is automatically
displayed upon starting. The volume is displayed if the volume has been specified in the
Worktable. Volumes can be corrected at this point. Empty destination locations are not
automatically displayed to allow the volume to be checked and entered at the start of the method.
If a volume is to be displayed automatically for destination labware at the start, enter a volume not
equal to "0" when editing. If you are using the Rack 96 (two-location rack), you must make
identical entries to the worktable for the two occupied locations.
Random Access
Random access allows scanning for the first and last position plus 8 other random positions.
Random access is recommended when tubes or wells have very similar filling levels within a
location and the scanning procedure time is to be reduced.
Random access performs liquid detection only in positions which are defined via Number of
Samples and Pattern. In the case of random access, the smallest volume determined is always
used for all tubes or wells of a location for aspirating or dispensing the liquid. If there is a number
of samples of 10 or less when the method is started, all the tubes affected are scanned by the
optical sensor.
Notes: If filling levels differ significantly in one location, check whether the Aspirate from bottom
and Dispense from top options are better alternatives to Random Access.
187
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
All positions
If automatic detection is required, Liquid Detection must be marked with All Positions.
If all wells are scanned in a 96-well plate or 24-tube rack, each volume is administered separately
when a single-channel dispensing tool is used.
In the case of eight-channel dispensing tools and a 96-well plate, the following applies: observe
the largest volume within a column (8 wells) when dispensing liquid. Observe the smallest
volume within a column (8 wells) when aspirating liquid.
12.3.2.3 Optical sensor check run
If the optical sensor is unable to perform location detection successfully, you have the option of
bypassing detection and entering the volume manually. To do so, mark User input. Check first
whether the correct labware is positioned in the location. The method may not be continued if
there is incorrect labware in the location.
Appendix A: Hardware
12
12.3.2.4 Switch Level Detection on and off
If Level Detection is switched on and if variants for scanning the surface of the liquid are selected
in the method for these locations, scanning is effected in the start routine.
If Liquid Detection for labware or Level Detection are switched off, all the volumes required are
queried at the start.
Labware, that is in the virtual parking positions is excluded from Level Detection.
If you would like to specify the volume, exceed the specified minimum volume after the start.
Make sure that you do not exceed the maximum volume. Once you have completed your input,
press Enter. The entry should match the actual filling level of tube.
The specified volume does not take account of the way the shape of the meniscus of the liquid
varies in the different tubes, for example. An inadequate volume could therefore lead to faulty
dispensing.
188
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
At the start, it is possible to make an individual volume entry or volume correction for each tube in
racks and reservoirs. With 96-well and 384-well plates, the one volume input applies to all wells.
Liquid Detection can be performed on a labware height up to 107 mm.
The optical sensor cannot be used for Liquid Detection in large tubes (e.g., 15 mL).
12.3.3
Detection variant 2: Tip detection
Both the identity of the tip racks (volume range; with/without filter) in the locations and the
presence of tips in the rack are detected. A code on the sides of the tip rack enables the tip type
and supply quantity to be detected. If more tips are required for the method than are present,
these extra tips are requested in the method once the existing tips have been exhausted. If tip
detection is switched off, you will have to ensure that the tip rack is adequately supplied starting
from the back left (coordinate A1) and that the specifications of the worktable corresponds to the
method to be started.
12.3.4
12
Detection variant 3: Location detection
Appendix A: Hardware
A code in the corresponding racks enables correct occupation of a worktable location to be
detected. Even racks positioned the wrong way round are detected, with the exception of
reservoir racks. Plates are detected by height.
Location Detection can be performed on a labware height up to 107 mm.
12.3.5
Detection limits
Depending on tube geometry, there are different detection limits for the optical sensor when
detecting filling level (liquid detection). Information about the detection limits can be displayed if
you click on Info in the file window. So that aspiration can be performed from tubes with filling
levels below the detection limit of the optical sensor, a volume must be entered at the start of the
method. This entry can be made in the start routine using the keyboard, even after the relevant
error message from the optical sensor. The detection limit of the optical sensor generally starts at
filling levels above 3 mm.
189
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13
13
13.1
Appendix B: Software
Appendix B: Software
Commands, parameters, options
This section includes detailed information about commands and parameters. This information is
supplemented by the descriptions in the section entitled "Operation".
The parameters and options of the commands are described in detail in the section entitled
"Sample Transfer". Parameters and options of individual commands which deviate from Sample
transfer are described separately.
13.1.1
Number of Samples
Use the Number of Samples command to specify how many samples are to be processed in the
subsequent steps of the procedure. It applies to all commands until the next Number of
Samples of the procedure. If you do not enter this command, a question is asked about the
number of samples when the device starts up. This entry then applies to all the commands of the
method.
13
The maximum number for Number of Samples results, dependent on the command, from the
plate or rack type in the destination or source tube location. For example, the largest value for two
384-well plates is 768.
Appendix B: Software
Further restrictions on the maximum number result from the pattern and the number of tubes per
rack or wells per plate. For example, the sum of the aspiration locations in the source tube
location during Sample Transfer can be smaller than the sum of the dispensing locations in the
destination tube location.
Depending on the type and purpose of the subsequent commands Number of Samples has
different effects:
• Sample Transfer: number of samples picked up by the source tube plate.
• Reagent Transfer: number of wells of the destination tube plate into which the reagent is
dispensed.
• Dilute: number of samples to be diluted.
• Pool and Pool One Destination: number of wells in the source tube plate from which liquid is
aspirated.
• Mix: number of wells in the plate in which the liquid is mixed.
13.1.1.1 Define parameters
• Fix Number of Samples:
Activate this option if a fixed number of samples is to be defined for each method start. At the
start, there is no Number of Samples request.
Deactivate this option if the number of samples at the start of the method is to be entered by
the user.
190
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
• Max Number of Samples:
At the start of the method, the number entered here is accepted as the maximum input value.
When the pattern is displayed, Max number of Samples is taken into account.
• Comment is displayed at the start of the method and the Number of Samples request. The
comment can provide information about which entries are meaningful here or to which
commands the entry relates (e.g., maximum number of samples, to single-channel or
eight-channel dispensing tool and Reagent or Sample Transfer).
Fix Number of Samples and Max Number of Samples both apply until the next Number of Samples
command in the procedure.
The Number of Samples request is asked first at the start. If Number of Samples is contained
several times in a procedure, the request occurs in succession as many times as required
(exception Fix Number of Samples).
If part of a procedure in the method is not to be executed, enter "0" as a value.
13.1.1.2 Information about entering Number of Samples
• Eight-Channel Dispensing Tools
13
Example for Number of Samples entries with an eight-channel dispensing tool:
Appendix B: Software
An entry of "1" to "8" means that 8 "samples" will be processed. An entry of "9" means that 16
"samples" will be processed etc. This applies correspondingly to a 384 plate. Note that with a
384-well plate, only every other well in a column will be served by the eight-channel
dispensing tool. Further procedure depends on the pattern.
• Sample Transfer
Example: a 96-well plate is to be filled by two full 24-position racks. For every rack the method
contains a Sample Transfer command in which a rack has been defined as source tube. The
Number of Samples command has been entered once. In order to transfer 24 samples to
the plate from both the racks, enter the value "24". A total of 48 transfers is thus effected. An
entry of 10 would mean that in each rack, the tool aspirates from 10 locations. The maximum
number for Number of Samples is 24.
If both racks are to be processed consecutively, a Sample Transfer command with both racks
as source tube is defined in the method. An entry of 30 would then mean that the Sample
Transfer would be carried out in full in the first rack (24 transfers) and six times in the second
rack. The maximum number for Number of Samples is 48.
In order for the different execution options to be detected at the start, enter a comment on the
Number of Samples when editing the method.
• Reagent Transfer
The entry of the Number of Samples for the Reagent Transfer relates to the destination tube.
• Dilute
Number of Samples before the Dilute command defines the numbers of samples to be
diluted. The dilution steps are defined in the pattern. Dilution steps are possible only within a
location; they are limited by a row or column. In other words, with a 96-well plate, all the wells
of one row can be filled with diluent and 12 dilution steps could be performed. In this case, the
undiluted sample would be aspirated from another location in the first step.
• Pattern
Examples for limiting the Number of Samples by the pattern in a Sample Transfer: If only
every second sample is aspirated from a 96 well plate (source tube), the maximum input is:
48 (96 : 2 = 48).
If one sample is aspirated from a 96 well plate (source tube) and dispensed twice into another
96 well plate (destination tube), then the maximum Number of Samples is 48.
Reason: Sample Transfer applies here from one source tube to one destination tube; here 48
x 2 = 96 applies. If, however, a second 96 well plate was available in the command as
destination tube, the 96 samples could be transferred either continuously (first plate A
complete, then plate B) or alternating (plate A, plate B, plate A, etc.). Whether the transfer is
continuous or alternating is defined in the pattern of the method.
191
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.2
Sample Transfer
The command transfers samples from several locations of a source tube plate to several
locations of a destination tube plate in accordance with the defined patterns.
Abb. 1:
Diagram of Sample Transfer
Fig. 1:
Diagram of Sample Transfer
The number of samples picked up from the source tube plate depends on the preceding
command Number of Samples.
13.1.2.2 Define parameters
Appendix B: Software
13
Pipet.Tool
Filter Tips:
Volume
Transfer type
Select Dispensing Tool The name "TS" (tool, single channel) stands for single-channel
dispensing tools while "TM" (tool, multi channel) stands for eight-channel dispensing tools. The
selection depends on the tubes used as well as on volume. Eight-channel dispensing tools
cannot be used with 24-tube racks, for example. When selecting the dispensing tool, be aware of
immersion depth into the tubes.
Define whether tips with filters are used in the method.
Enter the volume and select µL or nL. With volumes of up to 99.9 µL a decimal place is available.
Pipette: Aspiration and dispensing of the volume entered.
Multidispense: Dispensing of the volume entered at every dispensing step. Number of steps and
quantities aspirated depend on the Number of Samples.
Hint!
With small volumes, pipetting always provides better free-jet capability as well as precision and
correctness. When pipetting, in contrast to multidispense, only the required volume is aspirated
and dispensed. However, please note that multidispense represents a very rapid type of
dispensing. With the multidispense option, a 96-well plate can be filled in 35 to 60 seconds.
However, with multidispensing the measurement errors identified for pipetting are
exceeded(see Dispensing Tools on p. 156).
Source and
Destination:
A selection is only possible if the worktable is already equipped with labware. When you press
the Source or Destination button, displays with corresponding selection lists are available. The
selection is made using the labware positioned on the worktable. Up to four locations can be
selected as source or destination tubes within a command.
After selecting the source and destination tubes the respective labware names are displayed.
192
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
You can also dispense within a plate, in which case the source tube and destination tube are
identical.
If the source tube or destination tube labware is deleted from the worktable, the labware name is
shown in gray in the parameter configuration. The source tube or destination tube labware has to
be defined afresh or an error message is issued when starting the method.
Pattern:
Define pattern. You can define Pattern using automatic pattern detection, simple standard
pattern (Sample Transfer only) or free pattern (irregular). The patterns are independent of
direction. Regular patterns are detected by the software after just a few entries and completed
without further entries.
If the labware is changed after the pattern has been entered, the appropriate warning appears
when new labware is selected. If the same tube type (e.g., MTP 96) is retained, the pattern can
be adopted.
If no destination tube is defined in the pattern in default pattern or in pattern with automatic
sample detection, the software automatically completes the pattern in the direction of the rows
(from left to right).
13.1.2.3 Pattern with several plates as source or destination tubes
13
If several plates are available as source tubes and/or destination tubes, the display pattern is
expanded as follows:
Appendix B: Software
Begin entering the pattern with the top labware. The labware is displayed here in the order of the
source or destination tube definition. The source tube is shown on the left, the destination tube
on the right.
If the same sample or liquid is to be transferred to specific wells of all plates following the same
pattern, an entry for all plates in the Source or Destination display is only required for the first
transfer. During the second transfer only an entry in the very first labware of the source or
destination is required.
13.1.2.4 Example pattern for several plates
Hint!
Detailed descriptions on pattern can be found in the chapter "Operation" (see Editing the pattern
for a Transfer command on p. 64).
193
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Objective
One sample is to be transferred from a 24-tube rack in each case eight times to four 96-well
plates. The pattern for one plate is also to apply to the other plates.
This example describes only the steps relevant to a pattern. It is assumed that the worktable has
been supplied and commands and parameters have been specified.
1. Define the 24 well rack as source tube.
2. Define the 96 well plates as destination tube.
Appendix B: Software
13
194
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
3. Define the pattern. To do so, define an aspiration location of the source tube.
4. Define the dispensing locations of the destination tube.
13
Appendix B: Software
5. Click on the first well in the second plate.
The entire column will be adopted in accordance with plate 1. Continue analog with additional
destination tubes.
6. Complete the pattern. Subsequently the pattern for the destination tube only has to be
entered for the first plate. The pattern is transferred to all additional destination plates.
195
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.2.5 Options
You can make further settings via Options.
Immersion depth and dispensing height
13
Appendix B: Software
Aspirate from
bottom
This version is especially recommended for smaller tubes. It is not necessary to scan MTP and
PCR plates if the required volume is much smaller than the existing one.
At start only enter a volume for the plate which approximately corresponds to the actual volume
and allows for any aspirations and additions which may be required. The volume entered does
not affect the position of the pipette tip with Aspirate from bottom or Dispense from top. To prevent
the tubes overflowing during aspiration, the filling level of tubes must not exceed the working
volume. With Aspirate from bottom, the tip is positioned approx. 1 mm above the bottom of the
tube. The distance from the bottom of the tube depends on the tolerances of the tube type and
can be modified by the administrator. After liquid has been aspirated, the tip is moved slowly out
of the tube.
Aspirate from bottom is not recommended for tubes > 3 mL with high filling levels. In the case of
viscous solutions, the outer wetting which results may increase the risk of contamination and
falsify the dispensing result.
With very large tubes (e.g., Falcon or Reservoir) and high filling levels, it is even possible for the
entire tip and the cone of the dispensing tool to become wet. You should always avoid high filling
levels.
196
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
With large tubes, the length of the 50 µL and 300 µL tips and the dispensing tool result in
restrictions on immersion depth, leading to a higher remaining volume compared to the 1000 µL
tip.
Dispense from top
Elution from filter
Dispense from top is a fast version for dispensing a liquid into a destination tube, because the z
movement up to approx. 3 to 4 mm above the liquid prior to dispensing is omitted. Liquid is
dispensed in the top area of the tube. The tubes may not be filled above maximum filling volume.
Dispense from top can also be used for pipetting and on smaller tubes or plates with different
filling levels. As the tip remains in the top area of the tube and does not move down into the tube,
the risk of contamination is virtually ruled out. The greater distance from the liquid may impair
target accuracy at minimal dispensing volumes. With a small volume and tubes > 5 mL, the tip
might not reach the bottom of the tube or the liquid provided. There is a risk of the liquid touching
the tube wall above the liquid provided. With larger volumes, liquid could well splash up. Certain
dispensing speeds may not be exceeded for acceptable dispensing. Dispense from top should be
validated by corresponding trials.
This function is especially suited to the aspiration of liquids from corresponding filter plates
(currently only PCR cleanup filter plates). The following special features apply to this option:
• Do not enter a volume for Sample Transfer.
• The piston movement in the dispensing tool for aspirating liquid starts as soon as the tip
13
starts moving down in the well. Maximum stroke is used on every dispensing tool. This also
applies to dispensing.
Appendix B: Software
• The tip travels gently into the resilient filter material.
• In combination with the test PCR cleanup a Mix before aspirating is recommended.
• The Elution from filter function relates to the source tube.
With the elution function, virtually complete aspiration of the liquid from the filter plate is
achieved.
• In the Sample Transfer command under Transfer Type select pipette.
• The aspired liquid is dispensed into the destination tube.
When transporting the liquid, the usual appearance of the liquid in the pipette tip does not apply.
There may be air bubbles at several points in the pipette tip. The air segment at the bottom end of
the pipette tip may not be clearly pronounced.
At different volumes you save time if the optical sensor is not used to determine liquid level.
However, selecting Aspirate from bottom and Dispense from top ensures that liquids are dispensed
and professionally dispensed. You are still asked at the start to enter a volume for a plate with 96
wells (exception: destination plates which had a volume "0" when the worktable was edited). The
intention is to select an average volume for all wells with Aspirate from bottom or Dispense from
top.
13.1.2.6 Changing pipette tips (Change Tips)
Under Options you can determine the time when tips are changed.
The following is displayed:
197
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Change tips ...
• ... when command is finished
The tips are not ejected until the command is finished. This is recommended in the case of
repeated aspiration of a particular reagent for filling all the wells of a plate, for example.
• ... before asp. for next destination, well
Tip change before aspirating from a new location. If many different liquids are aspirated from
a plate or rack, the new liquids must not come into contact with old remaining liquid in the tip.
Tip change is therefore advisable.
• ... before each aspiration
No tip is filled twice, Even if it is the same source tube for the aspiration. Should always be
used for Mix after dispensing to prevent contamination of the source with liquid traces from
mixing in a destination tube.
• ... keep tips, do not change tips
The tips continue to be used in the next command. If the next command is likewise defined
keep tips, do not change tips, use also continues to the command after next and so on
(sensible if a nutrient medium is to be distributed on many empty plates, for example).
Particularly with liquid which tends to foam, failing to change tips after multiple aspirations can
lead to extra volume in the tip. This extra volume may cause contamination of the dispensing
tool. If transfer type pipette is changed to multidispense, after the first command an ejection
occurs even if keep tips, do not change tips is selected.
Appendix B: Software
13
• ... after: aspirations In the input field you can set the number of strokes after which the tips
should be ejected. This function is available if ... keep tips, do not change tips has been
selected.
Special features of multidispense:
With multidispense, a slight extra volume needs to be aspirated.
• ... before asp. for next destination, well:
– Extra volume is returned into the old source tube
– Change tip
– Liquid aspiration from new source tube
• ... before each aspiration:
– Extra volume is discarded into the waste
– Change tip
– Liquid aspiration from new or old source tube
198
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.2.7 Mix
Mix before aspiration or after dispensing
If Mix before aspirating and/or Mix after dispensing is selected, a display for setting mixing
parameters appears when you click on the adjacent button.
13
Appendix B: Software
If Fixed height is not selected, the following applies:
• The settings for immersion depth, blow-out (to remove remaining liquid), delay time to start
blow-out etc. are automatically taken from the selected liquid type.
• If Aspirate from bottom has been selected, this immersion depth also applies to Mix before
aspirating.
• If Dispense from top has been selected, the volume known at the start is used for mixing in
conjunction with the Liquid type immersion depth for Mix after dispensing.
Unlike with all other forms of dispensing (free flow) in dispensing with mixing there is contact with
the liquid in the destination tube. Particular note should be taken of this when setting tip change.
Mixing volume is always less than the current filling volume in the tube, as the remaining volume
of the aspiration cannot be used for mixing. The remaining volume for the correspondingly
marked tube may be viewed in the Labware properties section via the Open a labware window, for
example. In the case of very large tubes (e.g., 15 mL Falcon) larger remaining volumes result
with the 50µL and 300 µL tips in combination with the geometry of the dispensing tool than with
the 1000 µL tips.
In the case of deviations from the predefined liquid type, determine the optimum mixing speed in
trials. Carefully increase mixing speed during these trials. Use very high speeds only for
correspondingly viscous solutions. At very high speeds, large volumes and multiple mixing
cycles, liquid may get into the dispensing tool (e.g., foam formation). The use of filter tips will
increase reliability.
The complete mixing process takes place in the liquid. When the liquid is aspirated and
dispensed, the dispensing tool is moved on accordingly in the z direction. Blow-out is performed
at the end above the liquid. A mixing cycle consists of an upward and a downward movement.
The Mix after dispensing mixing variant can only be used in conjunction with the Pipette dispensing
variant.
More information on mixing is provided separately.
Hint!
199
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.2.8 Liquid types
If liquids whose physical properties of viscosity, vapor pressure and surface tension differ
significantly from those of water are to be dispensed, we recommend selecting a different liquid
type. The predefined liquid types are arranged to work at a consistent immersion depth for
aspiration. During aspiration, the dispensing tool moves on to suit aspiration speed, tube
geometry and aspiration volume.
Check every selected liquid type and every parameter change in conjunction with other
commands by test-running the method. The predefined liquid types represent recommendations.
Adapt the settings to your requirements as necessary.
~ 6 - 8 mm
~ 3 - 4 mm
13
A Dispense
B Drawing-up Following Aspiration
Appendix B: Software
Dispensing is effected approx. 3 to 4 mm
above the liquid. During dispensing, the
tool moves up so that the gap is
maintained. Exception: liquid type
"ProteinC" at 5 mm
Before the liquid is transported, the liquid
is drawn up in the pipette tip so that the
bottom part of the tip contains air during
the transport operation.
The following liquid types are available:
Liquid Type
Dispensing data
optimized for
50 µL tip:
pipetting
from
Alcohol 75%
Mixture of 75% ethanol 1 to 3 µL
and 25% water
50 µL tip:
dispensing
from
Remarks
3 µL
Washing reagent in kits for nucleic acid
purification. See applications in ep-Folder
Nucleic acid prep.
Speed Aspiration: low to medium
Speed Dispense: low to high
Alcohol 98%
Alcohol 98%
1 µL
3 µL
A new tip is prewetted with the liquid for
aspirating.
Speed Dispense: low
Only for multidispense using 300 µL filter tips:
very small gap from filter with 300 µL
aspiration. To avoid filter being wetted, in this
case default to pipetting from 280 µL.
Glycerol
Mixture of 40% glycerin 1 µL
and 60% water
5 µL
Glycerin content in many enzyme solutions is
much less than this, so Water can also be
used as the liquid type here.
Speed Aspiration: medium
Speed Dispense: medium to high; ZN
300-8:low
200
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Liquid Type
Dispensing data
optimized for
50 µL tip:
pipetting
from
Protein
Water with 1% albumin 5 µL
(10 g/l), 0.01% Triton
X-100
50 µL tip:
dispensing
from
Remarks
5 µL
When using a new tip, prewet it with the liquid
to be aspirated before the first dispensing
operation. Attention! Curvature of the liquid
surface will impair free-jet capability when
dispensing into cell culture plates. See
Proteinc.
Speed Aspiration: low to medium
Speed Dispense: low to medium
ProteinC
As for Protein
As for Protein
As for Protein
Proteinc uses when dispensing higher
distance to the calculated plain liquid surface
(4 to 5 mm) than Protein. All other data such
as Protein. Recommended for nutrient media.
13
Speed Aspiration: low to medium
Speed Dispense: low to medium
Rinse
3 µL
Like the Water liquid type but with a
significantly delayed blowout. Recommended,
e.g., in combination with mix to reduce the
residual moisture in the tip, but it can also
increase the contamination risk regarding
smaller containers (e.g., wells in PCR plate).
Appendix B: Software
For demineralized
1 µL
water and water with a
low surfactant content;
use the mix option or
independent MIX
command
Speed Aspiration: medium
Speed Dispense: medium
Speed_xl
Demineralized water;
mixed by means of
high dispensing speed
1 µL
3 µL
Thorough mixing in a 96-well DWP, for
example, with a 750 µl sample and 750 µl
dispense.
Caution! Higher risk of contamination,
especially with small tubes because of high
dispensing speed!
Speed Aspiration: medium
Speed Dispense: medium to high
Speed_xs
Water
Demineralized water;
very low aspiration
speed to avoid raising
sediment
1 µL
Demineralized water
1 µL
3 µL
E.g., for slow aspiration from filter plates.
Speed Aspiration: very low
Speed Dispense: medium
3 µL
Technical data relating to systematic and
random measuring deviation was determined
using this liquid type. Recommended for most
methods.
Speed Aspiration: medium
Speed Dispense: medium
201
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Change parameters of the liquid type
13
Appendix B: Software
The first time the display is called up, the standard parameters specified in the software for the
previously-selected liquid type, the previously-entered volume and the previously selected
dispensing type are displayed. This is indicated by default in the top right of the display. In the
event of changes, the display changes from default to changed. The liquid type can be reset to the
default parameters at any time with the Set Default button.
The variation of Movement Blow, Speed Blow and Delay Blow serves to optimize the dispensing of
remaining liquid.
Tab. 2:
202
Liquid Type Parameter
Parameter
Input range
Remarks
Speed Aspiration
0.2 to 110 mm/sec
In the case of viscous solutions and relatively large aspiration
volumes, Speed aspiration should be increased only moderately
so that the delayed aspiration of liquid can be completed before
the z movement of the carrier. Low values are meaningful for
phase separations, for example, or to avoid raising sediments or
particles.
Speed Dispense
0.2 to 110 mm/sec
Especially when dispensing relatively large volumes into an
empty tube, the risk of liquid splashing back can be reduced by
lower Speed Dispense values. At higher values, be aware of the
increased risk of contamination from the liquid splashing out.
Higher values are meaningful, for example, when dispensing into
a relatively large tube to achieve more thorough mixing.
Delay Blow
0 to 99990 msec
With liquids which have higher wetting properties and
consequently delayed draining characteristics, we recommend
increasing Delay Blow. The time can be set to zero for liquids
which do not wet very much. Increasing Delay blow means that
the method takes longer.
Speed Blow
0.2 to 110 mm/sec
The term Blow is used to describe the blow-out like with a
manual pipette. At lower values for Speed Blow, bubbles may form
at the outlet opening of the pipette tip in liquids with low surface
tension.
Movement Blow
0 to 100%
Extent of piston stroke in the blow-out step. This is slightly
different depending on dispensing tool. Speed Blow and Movement
Blow can be varied with the objective of reducing the splashback
of the liquid to be dispensed or the liquid already in the tube.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Parameter
Input range
Remarks
Initial Stroke
0 to 100%
Extent of piston when blowing out air after completed absorption
of liquid.
With changes of Initial Stroke the tips are changed automatically
due to technical reasons.
Prewetting
0 to 9 cycles
Prewetting is carried out only with a new unused tip in order to
create the same conditions for the first and for subsequent
dispensing steps. It is recommended for liquids with a low vapor
pressure to enrich the air space in the dispensing tool with
evaporated liquid to a comparable extent in all cases. It is also
recommended for liquids with reduced surface tension and
consequently delayed draining properties so as to achieve
comparable prewetting of the tip with solution for all dispensing
steps. Prewetting (1 cycle) it preset with the liquid types Alcohol
98%, Protein and ProteinC.
13
If the optimal setting of Initial Stroke is changed, it may lead to cross contamination.
Hint!
Appendix B: Software
Hint!
Changes in the liquid types are carried out at one's own responsibility and can possibly lead to a
deterioration of the technical data.
Please check the setting regarding the dispensing accuracy for each application.
The speed of liquid aspiration, liquid dispensing, drawing up and blow-out are optimized for the
liquid in question in each liquid type in order to achieve low-contamination dispensing up to the
working volume of the tubes.
With critical liquids, start checking with demineralized water. If this is successful, repeat the test
with the liquid actually envisaged.
The following must be confirmed in the check:
• Adequate precision and correctness are still achieved.
• No liquid splashes out (probability of contamination remains unchanged at low).
Abb. 9:
Aspirate, dispense and blow
upper end position
basic position
end of blow-out
Fig. 9:
Aspirate, dispense and blow
A Aspirate
To aspirate a sample, the piston moves
upwards from the default position.
B Dispense
Multidispense: return to default position
by means of short individual steps.
Pipette: total path in one step.
C Blow
Remaining liquid is discarded by means
of blow-out.
203
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.3
Reagent Transfer
A reagent is transferred from a source tube labware location to several destination tube labware
locations. Reagent Transfer is best suited to transferring a reagent to several plates.
Abb. 1:
Reagent transfer principle
Fig. 1:
Reagent transfer principle
In Reagent Transfer the entry for Number of Samples relates to the destination tube.
All other entries and selection options are comparable to those of Sample Transfer.
In Reagent Transfer several source tube locations with liquid might be present.
Hint!
13
13.1.3.2 Special case: use of several sources
Appendix B: Software
For Reagent Transfer you can define methods in which more than one tube is defined as source
tube. The software can access the next tube automatically after the first tube has been emptied,
to fill the destination plate for example. You no longer have to fill the first tube completely.
If the optical sensor is switched on, the first source tube is scanned. If, during this process, the
software detects that there is too little liquid for the number of samples, the Checkrun window
appears. The minimum volume, maximum volume and calculated volume are displayed. You can
now select how the optical sensor is to proceed (continue, abort, etc.).
To incorporate the next tube in the calculation, select accept level and continue. The optical sensor
continues by scanning the next tubes. The volumes determined are totaled and the method
started when the volume is adequate.
The optical sensor also detects empty tubes that have been defined as source tubes in the
pattern. The message appears with a Calculated volume of 0 µL. Confirm with Accept level and
continue to scan the subsequent tubes.
If the level detection is switched off, a request for entering the volume appears for the source tube
locations of the pattern. The total volume required is assigned only to the first tube in the entry
list. For all other source tube locations the left-hand column contains "1". The "1" serves as a
reminder to assign the individual volumes to the tubes.
13.1.4
Dilute
Dilute facilitates the creation of dilution series. A defined volume is transported from well to well
by means of pipetting. Before the Dilute command diluent (diluent reagent) must be dispensed
using a Reagent Transfers. The Reagent Transfer command fills the wells with the diluent
required. Dilute can be executed using a source plate (undiluted samples) and a destination plate
(dilution steps).
204
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Abb. 1:
Dilute command principle (destination tube plate)
Undiluted Sample
Fig. 1:
Diluent
Diluent
Diluent
1. Dilution
2. Dilution
3. Dilution
Dilute command principle (destination tube plate)
The Number of Samples command before Dilute defines the numbers of samples to be diluted.
The dilution steps are defined in the pattern and only possible within one location. They are
limited by a row or a column.
If the Dilute command is executed within a single plate, the source and destination tube areas on
the plate must not overlap. This can be achieved by limiting the number of samples with the
Number of Samples command.
Hint!
To achieve thorough mixing of sample and diluent, under Mix you should use Mix after dispensing.
Mixing is performed after every dispensing step. Mix before aspirating refers only to mixing before
the first aspiration, i.e. mixing the undiluted sample. All other entries and selection options are
comparable to those of Sample Transfer.
13
Appendix B: Software
13.1.4.2 Example dilution series
This example explains the principle of a dilution series. This is not a concrete application.
Sequence and objective of a dilution series
• 24 samples are in a rack with 24 containers and are to be diluted 1:1000.
• Dilution takes place in 3 stages with 1:10 dilutions in each case.
To achieve this, the 24 samples are transferred to a 96-well plate.
205
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Diluent is transferred from a 300 mL reservoir to the 96-well plate.
Work is performed first with a single-channel dispensing tool and then later, to speed up the
process, with an eight-channel dispensing tool.
Method
First samples and then diluent should be transferred to the 96-well MTP. The dilutions are
performed in the MTP 96.
In the Sample Transfer command 200 µL of sample are respectively put in the micro test plate.
The pattern for the 24 samples in the destination tube looks as follows:
Appendix B: Software
13
In the Reagent Transfer command the empty wells of the micro test plate are filled with 225 µL of
diluent. From this point on, an eight-channel dispensing tool executes the task.
The pattern of the destination tube looks as follows:
In the Dilute command 25 µL of sample (A-1) is aspirated and mixed with the 225 µL of diluent
(e.g., A-2). This is performed three consecutive times (A-3 and A-4). These three dilutions (1:10)
lead to a 1:1000 dilution (MTP columns 4, 8 and 12).
206
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Calling up Show Process in the Dilute command must show the following pattern for Dilute:
13
Each dilution step in this example is a 1:10 dilution. The desired dilution of 1:1000 is achieved by
the third 1:10 dilution. The volume which is aspirated from the undiluted sample also applies to
the dilution steps.
Pool
Appendix B: Software
13.1.5
With the Pool command you combine liquids from several wells as well as different source tube
locations.
Because with multiaspirate following each sample aspiration a drawing-up of the liquid in the tip
occurs, the aspirated liquid segments are in the beginning separated by air bubbles. With a filled
tip the content is dispensed into the destination tube. Which locations of the source are pooled for
one location each of the destination tube is defined in the pattern.
13.1.5.1 Define pattern
The pattern for the Pool command differs slightly from the pattern for other transfer commands.
The following steps briefly describe the special features of the Pool command.
1. In the parameter window of the command click on the Pattern button.
2. In the pattern window click on the source locations from which the liquid is to be pooled in the
desired order.
3. In the destination tube plate click on the location where the pooled liquid is to be dispensed.
4. In the source click on the next sequence of locations from where the liquid is to be pooled.
207
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
5. In the destination click on the next location where the pooled liquid is to be dispensed.
13
6. As soon as the pattern is identified, confirm with the OK key.
13.1.5.2 Options
Appendix B: Software
Change Tips
Change tips ...
• .... before asp. for next destination, well ...
Is the default setting. Tips are only changed when the next pool has been assembled for the
next destination location.
All other entries and selection options are comparable to those of Sample Transfer.
13.1.5.3 Enter Number of Samples for Pool
The entry of the Number of Samples relates to the source tube. The number of samples divided
by "Number of Samples per Destination" gives the number of destination locations. If a decimal
place results from the division, the number is rounded up for destination locations. The pattern in
the source is also executed completely for the last destination location. In the Pool pattern, a
maximum of the samples occurring in a row or column can be pooled.
Example: the samples of each column of a 96-well plate are to be pooled in a destination plate.
In other words, 8 samples are always put into a tube.
• Number of Samples entry at start: 48
48 : 8 = 6
6 destination tubes are filled.
208
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
• Number of Samples entry at start: 50
50 : 8 = 6.25
7 destination tubes are filled.
The command is executed in the source up to location 56 inclusive (prerequisite: no limit in
the Number of Samples command).
13.1.6
Pool One destination
With the PoolOneDest command you dispense the liquids from several source tube locations into
one destination tube location.
The Number of Samples entry determines the number of locations in which aspiration will be
performed. There is only one location as destination tube.
With the multiaspirate transfer type, the liquid is drawn up in the tip following every dispensing
step. The same criteria apply here as to the Pool command.
13.1.6.1 Define pattern
13
Appendix B: Software
The pattern for the Pool One Destination command differs slightly from the pattern for other
transfer commands. The following steps briefly describe the special features for the Pool One
Destination command. In the pattern the locations are defined for the source tube where
aspiration is to take place and the direction of the aspiration steps. Next the destination tube is
only selected once.
1. In the parameter window of the command click on the Pattern button.
2. In the pattern window click on the first and the second source tube location to define the
direction for pooling the liquid.
3. In the destination tube plate click on the location where the pooled liquid is to be dispensed.
4. As soon as the pattern is identified, confirm with the OK key.
209
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.6.2 Options
Change Tips
13
Change tips ...
• ... when command is finished
Appendix B: Software
Is the default setting. The tips are not ejected until the command is finished.
All other settings are comparable with Sample Transfer.
13.1.7
Mix
Use this command to mix liquids within a location.
The complete mixing process takes place in the liquid. When the liquid is aspirated and
dispensed, the dispensing tool is moved on accordingly in the z direction. A mixing cycle consists
of an upward and a downward movement. The travel results from the selected volume.
Use only 50 µL tips for mixing in 384-well plates!
Hint!
The descriptions of the mixing process for Sample Transfer (see Mix on p. 199) also apply to this
stand-alone Mix command.
210
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.7.1 Recommended mixing speeds (Speed)
Enter the mixing speed in the Speed window. The speed range is between 0.2 and 110 mm/sec.
As long as there is no entry in the input field for Speed, this field always displays the aspiration
speed of the selected liquid type. The speeds in the Liquid Type parameters are optimized for
pipetting or multidispensing in combination with the selected dispensing tool and the selected
volume.
Dispensing tool
Recommended
lower volume range
(mm/sec)
Recommended
medium volume
range
Recommended high
volume range
(mm/sec)
(mm/sec)
TS 50
15 - 88
15 - 44
10 - 40
TM 50-8
15 - 88
15 - 44
10 - 40
TS 300
5 - 15
6 - 16
6 - 16
TM 300-8
2 - 11
2 - 11
2 - 11
TS 1000
4 - 15
4 -15
4 - 15
TM 1000-8
4 - 15
4 -15
4 - 15
13
Hint!
Appendix B: Software
The optimum mixing speed should be determined in trials. Increase mixing speed carefully during
these trials. Use very high speeds only for correspondingly viscous solutions.
At very high speeds, large volumes and multiple mixing cycles, liquid may get into the dispensing
tool (e.g., foam formation). In this case, perform method run tests using demineralized water. The
use of filter tips will increase reliability.
13.1.7.2 Mixing volume
The mixing volume must always be less than the current filling volume in the tube, as the
remaining volume of the aspiration cannot be used for mixing.
You can have the remaining volume displayed in the Labware properties. In the case of very large
tubes (e.g., 15 mL) larger remaining volumes result with the 50 µL and 300 µL tips in combination
with the geometry of the dispensing tool than with the 1000 µL tips.
13.1.7.3 Mixing functions at Fixed Height
With Fixed Height a mixing process with a defined aspirating height and dispensing height can be
determined.
211
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Hint!
Fixed Height should only be used for filling levels below the filling volume. At larger filling volumes,
depending on the immersion depth selected, liquid may be forced out of the tube or well.
Enter the distance from the bottom of the tube in mm as the height.
Asp. stands for the distance of the pipette tip to the bottom of the tube when aspirating, Disp.
stands for the distance of the pipette tip to the bottom of the tube when dispensing.
If you enter 0 mm in the Asp. field a correction of approx. ca. 2 mm upwards occurs after the
execution. The correction depends on tube type and the tolerances of the tube type.
If you choose for Disp. a height which lies above the tube the dispensing is reduced automatically
to the height of the tube.
If you select a height for Disp., which is below that of Asp., Disp. is raised to a height of Asp. on
execution.
13.1.8
Exchange
This command is used to switch labware to the location in the current method.
Appendix B: Software
13
Hint!
The request to replenish identical tip racks (identical volume, with/without filter) is made
automatically by the program, so no more tip racks of the same type need to be positioned in the
parking positions.
Labware placed on the worktable from the parking positions within a method is not scanned by
the optical sensor.
13.1.8.1 Define parameters
There are 2 selection lists to enable you to view the labware on the worktable and in the parking
positions. Selection enables Exchange for subsequent commands. When the method is started,
at the request Exchange the location in question is displayed in addition to the name of the
labware.
Hint!
212
An alternative to Exchange is splitting into various part-methods. This would also allow liquid
detection by the optical sensor for the labware to be used subsequently.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.9
Wait
Use the Wait command to insert a pause in the method, e.g., to take account of
temperature-control periods between two additions of reagent.
The duration of the pause is specified in the parameter settings.
13
Appendix B: Software
13.1.10 Comment
Use the Comment command to display a comment at a certain point during execution of the
method.
The comment command entered is shown marked as a command line during the method run, no
separate window is displayed.
213
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.11 User intervention
Use this command to interrupt a method, for example to perform manual steps.
13
If there is to be an alarm immediately before the manual intervention, mark the Alarm field.
Enter a corresponding comment on the intervention in the Comment field.
Appendix B: Software
For methods with external steps which lead to a change in volume, divide these into 2 methods.
The following things must not happen at all with User Intervention:
•
•
•
•
Change in position of carrier.
Exchange of dispensing tools in locations T1 – T4.
Positioning of labware which is not known to the method.
Labware which is removed and then replaced may not be changed externally in terms of
volume.
• Distance from labware required in the method. The waste container can be emptied in
conjunction with this command. Then position the waste container correctly again.
13.1.12 TempCycler (only epMotion 5075 MC)
The command is only available on the epMotion 5075 MC with built-in Mastercycler ep.
With the TempCycler command the temperature of the cycler block and/or the cycler lid are
controlled by a cycler program. To set temperature-control, open the parameters of the
TempCycler command. Reckon on a time of approx. 3 minutes to heat up the cycler block and the
ESP heated lid.
214
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.1.13 StartCycler (only epMotion 5075 MC)
Use the StartCycler command to select a cycler program and specify the start. This command
must always be the last command of a method.
13
The cycler program can be selected via the button ... can be selected in the own user directory.
If the cycler is being operated without an epMotion, please note the following:
Appendix B: Software
• If you work with simulated block control, after the start the number of samples and the filling
volume are queried. You furthermore select between tube and plate.
• Cycler program without epMotion method: this is the only case in which you can use a
semi-skirted or unskirted PCR plate.
To edit a cycler program,
mark the cycler program in the application file window and then pressOpen application.
215
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Hint!
13.2
You can find detailed information on the Cycler program in the additional operating manual of the
Mastercycler ep with epBlue.
Importing commands from a CSV file
When working with biological material (e.g., protein solutions, nucleic acid solutions), it may be
necessary to transfer defined quantities of different samples from various parent solutions to a
target container in order to adjust the concentration (thus creating standards). The quantities of
sample material that must be transferred can be determined by physical measurements (e.g., by
using spectroscopic methods, enzymatic analysis, or chemical methods), and the resulting
quantities can then be listed in a table.
Using the menu function Edit - Import from CSV you can import a table in CSV format defining the
volumes of sample material to be transferred from locations of a source tube to selected locations
of a destination tube.
The imported table is converted into a sequence of Sample Transfer commands. With every
imported Sample Transfer command the liquid of a specific source location is transferred to a
specific destination location. The automatic pattern detection is not active for this command.
13
Appendix B: Software
You can create and edit tables in CSV format using an editor or a spreadsheet. By importing a
procedure from a file you can reuse the same sequence of commands in different methods by
simply importing the sequence again from the same source file.
13.2.1
Creating a CSV file for import
A CSV file is an ASCII text file defining the structure and content of a table. Each line of text in the
CSV file describes a row in the table. The content of the cells in each table row are separated by
commas, semicolons or tab keys. You can create and edit a CSV with any simple ASCII text
editor (e.g., Windows Notepad) or a spreadsheet (e.g., Microsoft Excel). The format of the CSV
file has changed compared to epBlue Version 10.x.
Hint!
If you use Microsoft Excel to create or edit a CSV file for import, make sure that the default
separator for lists is not identical to the decimal point. I.e. in the Regional Settings for "English" in
the Windows Control Panel the default separator for lists is a comma, so you cannot use the
comma as a decimal point. Save your edited table in CSV format before exiting Excel (you do not
need to save it also as an Excel file).
To create a CSV file make sure that the following prerequisites are met.
1. If you create your table in a spreadsheet and then export it to the CSV format make sure that
the original spreadsheet file only contains one sheet, because only one sheet with table data
can be exported to a CSV file.
2. Every Transfer command must be defined in a separate line. the values must be sorted as
follows into 6 columns: "Rack" (Source rack), "Source" (Source location), "Rack" (Destination
rack), "Destination" (Destination location), "Volume" (Transfer volume in µL), "Tool"
(dispensing tool). The values in every line must be separated by commas, semicolons or tab
keys. For decimal figures the decimal point or comma can be used. Make sure that the
separator for lists is not identical to the decimal point.
To illustrate the required file structure the first table rows of a CSV file are shown in the
example below the way they appear in the spreadsheet:
216
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
In comparison the same CSV file is shown here as it appears in an ASCII text editor:
3. The values in the 6 rows of the CSV file must start in the second line of the file and then
continue uninterrupted. No further entries must be made under these values because these
would be interpreted as a command during import and cause errors.
4. If a line starts with “#”, it is interpreted as comment and not imported.
5. A maximum of 500 Transfer commands can be imported from a CSV file into a method.
6. The number of racks specified in the CSV file as source and definition locations must match
the number of racks defined in the first Sample Transfer command added manually to the
method prior to importing the file. A maximum of 4 source locations and 4 destination
locations can be used on the worktable. The exact source and destination locations on each
plate can be entered as figures (1, 2, 3, etc.) or as alphanumerical coordinates on the plate
(A1, B5, A3, etc.)
13
Appendix B: Software
7. The tool numbers in the CSV file must match the dispensing tools as follows:
• 1 - TS_50
• 2 - TS_300
• 3 - TS_1000
TM dispensing tools cannot be used. It is recommended to avoid frequent dispensing tool
changes within a method.
13.2.2
Importing a CSV file
Proceed as follows to import a sequence of Sample Transfer commands from a CSV file.
Make sure that the CSV file meets the requirements for import.
Hint!
1. As a first step always add a Number of Samples command in a new procedure (see Adding a
command to the program on p. 59).
2. In the parameter area of the Number of Samples command, enable the "Fix number of
samples" option and set the number of samples to 1.
The number of samples is now limited for the following steps, so that every Sample Transfer
command that follows is only executed once (i.e. for one sample).
217
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
3. As a second step add a Sample Transfer command in the procedure (see Adding a command
to the program on p. 59).
The first Sample Transfer command and its source and destination locations on the worktable
serve as master configuration for the complete sequence of the commands imported from the
CSV file. Only the source and destination locations defined manually in this first Sample
Transfer command will be available during the sequence of the imported command.
4. Define the source and destination locations for the Sample Transfer command (see Define
the source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer on p. 62).
13
Appendix B: Software
The following example shows a Sample Transfer command with 2 source locations and 2
destination locations. These locations are available for the imported command sequence.
The number of racks specified in the CSV file as source and destination locations must match
the number of racks defined with the first Sample Transfer command. A maximum of 4 source
locations and 4 destination locations can be defined. The rack locations are then used in the
order in which they appear in the parameter area of the first Sample Transfer command. I.e. if
source rack 2 is specified in the file, the second rack in the list of source locations is used as
source rack for the step.
5. In the Options and Mix tabs in the parameter area of the Sample Transfer command define the
options and mixing configurations you want to use for the sequence of the imported
commands.
The options and mixing configurations manually defined for the first Sample Transfer
command are copied and used for all imported commands. The "Elution from filter" option is
not available for imported commands.
218
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
6. Check the parameter settings for the first Sample Transfer command and ensure that they
meet the requirements for the complete sequence of commands.
Please pay particular attention to the mixing volume and the mixing speeds, because these
settings must be suitable for all imported commands. The preset value for the mixing speed
must be overwritten manually with a different value. If you want to use different dispensing
tools (including TS_300), a mixing speed of 11 mm/sec is recommended.
7. To import the command sequence from the file click on the Sample Transfer command in the
program list to make sure it has been selected.
13
8. In the main menu select Edit - Import from CSV.
9. Select the CSV file you want to import and click on Open.
Appendix B: Software
The CSV file is imported. Every line defined in the CSV file is added to the procedure as a
Sample Transfer command with the settings defined in the file for source, destination, volume
and tool. The imported command sequence is displayed in the program list.
A maximum of 500 Transfer commands can be imported from a CSV file into a method.
219
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.3
Predefined methods
The User ep contains four subfolders with several applications for you to copy to your user
directory where you can edit or start them.
Mehods contained in ep cannot be started or edited there directly.
13
This section provides you with an overview of the available applications and a short description.
Appendix B: Software
More detailed information on the applications in the list below and for additional applications can
be found under "Applications" at www.epmotion.com.
Hint!
13.3.1
To better understand the descriptions you should display the contents of a method. Select the
method and the information is displayed on the right-hand side of the screen.
Nucleic acid prep
PDNA1
The PDNA1 method includes steps 1 to 8 of the method Perfectprep‚ Plasmid 96 VAC DB. The
subsequent steps of this method can be found in PDNA2 (see below).
Four transfer commands.
Reagents in the test set are in 6 reservoirs (30 mL) in the reservoir rack. Using the reservoirs 1
to 3.
Filling the destination plate dependent on the entry in Number of Samples.
Using the dispensing tool TM 1000-8.
Followed by external step (vacuum chamber).
PDNA2
Continuation of method PDNA1.
Step 8 to 16 of the method Perfectprep‚ Plasmid 96 VAC DB.
Reagent from the reservoirs 4 to 6.
Dispensing tool TM 1000-8.
Using the park positions and the Exchange command.
Command Wait for observing the incubation times.
Note:
The method is offered as a fully automated process for epMotion 5075 VAC.
13.3.2
PCR setup
Modular rack A
13.3.3
Routine
10 ml tubes to plate
220
Method for filling a PCR plate with 8 different DNA samples and 12 different primer pairs from a
full reservoir rack.
Uses a 16 mm rack with 10 mL tubes (tubes with conical bottom and screw cap) to fill four rows
of a 96er twin.tec PCR plate in turn.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
384 to 4x96
Sample transfer of a 384 well plate to four 96 well plates. Design with eight channel dispensing
tool.
4x 24 to 96
Sample transfer of four thermoracks to a 96 well PCR plate.
4x 96 to 384
Sample transfer of four 96well plates to one 384 well plate.
96 to 4x24
Sample transfer of a 96 well plate to four thermoracks. Design with single channel dispensing
tool.
Admirable results
Filling of two Deepwell plates 2.2 mL with 1000 µL per well. Sampling from four 100 mL
reservoirs.
Dilute 1to10 –
1to1000
Executing a diluting series using the Dilute command. By way of reagent transfer diluent is
transfered to a 96 well plate. By way of sample transfer samples are then transfered from a 24
well rack into the still empty columns of the plate in front of the already dispensed diluent.
The transfered unthinned sample is then thinned in three stages (Dilute command).
Disperse from 1 to 2 Using Sample Transfer a transfer is made from a 96 well plate to two 96 well PCR plates.
13
An eight channel dispensing tool is used. Each sample is dispensed with the same tip to two
different plates.
The tip is changed prior to sampling a new sample.
Simple fast method for filling a 24 well thermorack with 1000 µL liquid pro Safe Lock tube.
Sampling from a 30 mL reservoir.
Fill 384
Simple fast filling of a 384 well twin.tec PCR plate with 20 µL water per well using the dispensing
tool TM 50-8.
Appendix B: Software
Fill 24
Dispensing is by way of multi-dispensing. Sampling from a 30 mL reservoir. The method is
recommended for checking the dispensing precision.
It is highly recommended to also dispense and evaluate using the dispensing version "pipette".
Fill 96
Simple fast filling of a 96 well twin.tec PCR plate with 100 µL water per well using the dispensing
tool TM 300-8.
Dispensing is by way of multi-dispensing. Sampling from a 30 mL reservoir. The method is
recommended for checking the dispensing precision.
It is highly recommended to also dispense and evaluate using the dispensing version "pipette".
LI384_1
Method fills a 384 well plate with different solutions in a "checkered" pattern using a single
channel dispensing tool.
The method and in particular the pattern shown can thus be used as the basis for independent
contamination checks
Modification of volume, plate, liquid type etc. is recommended for the actual task.
LI384_8
Similar to LI384_1 but using an eight channel dispensing tool.
The checkered pattern results from the fact that the eight channel dispensing tool can only fill
every second well of a 384 well plate. The method and in particular the pattern shown can thus
also be used as the basis for independent contamination checks
Modification of volume, plate, liquid type etc. is recommended for the actual task.
Modular rack B
Filling of two 24 well platds with 1,800 µL liquid A and 2,000 2.000 µL liquid B from a reservoir
rack equipped with modular rackes with 50 mL and 15 mL tubes.
Pattern1
Filling every second column of a 96 well plate using the dispensing tool TM 300-8. Filling the
columns using a reagent transfer.
Reagent sampling from a 30 mL reservoir.
Pool
Using the Pool command 4 adjacent wells in a column of a 96 well plate are combined
("aspirate") and transfered into a Safe Lock tube in a thermorack.
PoolOneDestination
Collecting the content of a 96 well plate in a 300 mL reservoir.
221
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
13.3.4
Sequencing setup
ABI 384
For preparation of the mastermixe see method properties. The method can be
executed with every epMotion
The method dispenses mastermix and templates in a 384well twin.tec PCR plate.
ABI 96
For preparation of the mastermixe see method properties. The method can be
executed with every epMotion
The method dispenses mastermix and templates in a 96well twin.tec PCR plate.
Appendix B: Software
13
222
Amersham 384
The method dispenses mastermix and template to max. 384 locations of a twin.tec
PCR plate.
Amersham 96
The method dispenses mastermix and template to max. 96 locations of a twin.tec
PCR plate.
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
14
14
14.1
Appendix C: BIOS password
Appendix C: BIOS password
Changing the BIOS password
To prevent unauthorized access to the BIOS setup a password can be set up:
1. Switch on the PC.
2. As soon as the BIOS starts press "F2" to open the setup.
3. Use the cursor to go to "security".
4. Use the cursor to go to "set supervisor password" and press Enter.
The password field opens.
5. Enter and confirm a password.
6. Press F10 to save and exit the BIOS setup.
14
Appendix C: BIOS password
223
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Index
Index
A
Index
Accessory
Item number .............................................................160
Activate labware...............................................................84
Adapters
Labware folder/.........................................................182
Thermoadapter Frosty..............................................179
Comment ....................................................................... 213
Add a command to a method...........................................59
Comment command ....................................................... 73
Admin tab.........................................................................98
Connect client.................................................................. 99
Administrator login ...........................................................97
Control method run.......................................................... 80
Application files................................................................37
Control tab ....................................................................... 80
Application properties ......................................................43
Copying applications ....................................................... 42
Application Support........................................................183
Create user account ...................................................... 102
Aspirate from bottom......................................................196
Creating a user account ................................................ 103
Aspiration volume ............................................................21
D
Autoclaving
Thermoadapter, thermoblock, thermorack ...............154
Data backup .................................................................. 110
Automated pipetting system
Item number .............................................................160
Deactivate labware ......................................................... 84
B
Data backup and restoration ......................................... 110
Debug log ................................................................ 79, 112
Debug log for method run................................................ 79
before aspiration for next destination, well.....................198
Decontamination............................................................ 155
before each aspiration ...................................................198
Define module rack.................................................. 86, 175
Bottom tolerance..............................................................85
Defining the procedure .................................................... 57
C
Delete application ............................................................ 44
Carrier
Technical data ..........................................................159
Deleting user accounts .................................................. 104
Change tips....................................................................197
Detection versions ......................................................... 186
Change liquid type .........................................................200
Dilute ............................................................................. 204
Changing the user password .........................................105
Dilute command .............................................................. 70
Check commands ............................................................67
Dimensions.................................................................... 156
Check the method............................................................67
Dispense from top ......................................................... 197
Cleaning
Dispensing Tools ......................................................154
Thermoadapter, thermoblock, thermorack ...............154
Worktable base adapter ...........................................154
Worktable .................................................................154
Dispensing error ............................................................ 127
Client connection .............................................................99
Command check..............................................................67
Command icons...............................................................58
Command overview .........................................................58
Command parameters ...............................................61, 68
Command reference list...................................................68
Commands
Comment..................................................................213
Dilute ........................................................................204
Exchange .................................................................212
Mix............................................................................210
224
Number of Samples ................................................. 190
Pool.......................................................................... 207
Pool One destination................................................ 209
Reagent Transfer ..................................................... 204
Sample Transfer....................................................... 192
StartCycler ............................................................... 215
TempCycler .............................................................. 214
User intervention...................................................... 214
Wait.......................................................................... 213
Destination....................................................................... 62
Dispensing sequence ...................................................... 32
Dispensing tool
Installing..................................................................... 32
Removal ..................................................................... 32
Sealing ring replacement ......................................... 153
Dispensing Tools ..................................................... 15, 184
Cleaning................................................................... 154
Item number............................................................. 160
Technical data.......................................................... 156
Disposal......................................................................... 166
Dosing device .................................................................. 97
Download labware ........................................................... 93
Duplicate application ....................................................... 50
Duplicate command......................................................... 60
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
E
Edit command..................................................................61
Edit labware ...............................................................46, 56
Edit procedure .................................................................57
Edit worktable ..................................................................53
Editing user accounts ....................................................102
Editing user groups ........................................................108
Elution from filter ............................................................197
epT.I.P.S. Motion ............................................................168
Equip Holder with Tubs + Modules
Labware folder/.........................................................182
Error log .........................................................................112
Error messages
Dispensing error.......................................................127
Optical sensor read error .........................................126
Labware
definition .................................................................. 183
Folder....................................................................... 183
Labware ..................................................................... 32
Labware bottom tolerance ............................................... 85
Labware editing ............................................................... 46
Labware files ................................................................... 38
Labware on the Worktable............................................... 53
Labware positioning......................................................... 54
Labware properties.......................................................... 56
Labware tab ..................................................................... 82
Labware Update .............................................................. 93
Liquid Detection ....................................................... 15, 188
Liquid options ................................................................ 200
Liquid Type ...................................................................... 69
Exchange command ........................................................72
Liquid types
Parameter ................................................................ 202
Export application ............................................................45
List of commands ............................................................ 68
Exchange .......................................................................212
F
Fault finding ...................................................................126
Features.......................................................................1313
File window ......................................................................37
Fill rack ............................................................................86
Fill reservoir rack .............................................................90
Filled module rack......................................................90, 90
Filling volume ...................................................................18
Firmware Update .............................................................96
Fix Number of Samples .................................................190
Fluid displacement...........................................................19
Folder properties..............................................................43
Functions tab ...................................................................94
G
Group overview..............................................................107
H
Height Adapter ...............................................................178
Item number .............................................................162
Home tab ........................................................................35
I
Import application ............................................................44
Import commands (CSV) .................................................67
Loading the worktable ..................................................... 53
Log off ............................................................................. 35
Logfiles ...................................................................... 51, 81
Logging in as administrator ............................................. 97
Login ............................................................................... 33
M
Maintenance
Dispensing tool sealing ring ..................................... 153
Dispensing Tools...................................................... 153
Max Number of Samples ............................................... 191
Method
Check Labware prior to start.................................... 126
Method check .................................................................. 67
Method run ................................................................ 74, 80
Method run logfile ........................................................... 81
Methods
Nucleic acid prep ..................................................... 220
PCR setup................................................................ 220
Predefined................................................................ 220
Routine .................................................................... 220
Sequencing setup .................................................... 222
Mix ................................................................................. 210
Fixed Height............................................................. 211
Mixing volume .......................................................... 211
SPEED..................................................................... 211
Intended Use
Warnings ....................................................................23
mix after dispensing....................................................... 199
Irregular pattern ...............................................................66
Mix command .................................................................. 72
K
keep tips, do not change tips .........................................198
Index
Edit pattern ......................................................................64
L
mix before aspirating ..................................................... 199
Mixing ............................................................................ 199
Mixing speed ................................................................. 211
Mixing volume................................................................ 211
225
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
Mode of operation............................................................13
Labware folder/ ........................................................ 182
Modular rack
Item number .............................................................162
Pool ............................................................................... 207
Index
N
Pool command ................................................................ 71
Pool One destination ..................................................... 209
Network............................................................................99
Pool One Destination command ..................................... 71
New application ...............................................................41
Positioning labware.......................................................... 54
New folder........................................................................39
Print application ............................................................... 51
New user account ..........................................................102
Printing logfiles .............................................................. 112
Noise level .....................................................................158
Procedure tab .................................................................. 57
Nucleic acid prep
Methods ...................................................................220
Quick start ..................................................................... 114
Number of Samples .......................................................190
Number of Samples command .......................................69
O
Open an application.........................................................38
Open user tree...............................................................215
Operating controls
Dispensing Tools ........................................................15
Optical sensor ............................................................15
Overview ....................................................................14
Optical sensor..................................................................95
Detection limits .........................................................189
Detection versions....................................................186
Function....................................................................185
Read error ................................................................126
Tasks ..........................................................................15
Technical data ..........................................................158
Tip detection.............................................................189
Overview of commands ...................................................58
P
Parameter ..................................................................61, 68
Filter Tips .................................................................192
Fix Number of Samples............................................190
Max Number of Samples..........................................191
multidispense ...........................................................192
Pipet.Tool .................................................................192
Pipette ......................................................................192
Transfer Type............................................................192
Volume .....................................................................192
Q
R
Rack 96 ......................................................................... 170
Rack LC ......................................................................... 170
Racks............................................................................. 170
Item number............................................................. 162
Random Access ............................................................ 187
Reagent reservoirs
Item number............................................................. 161
Reagent Transfer ........................................................... 204
Reagent Transfer command ........................................... 70
Reagent tubes ............................................................... 170
Recent applications ......................................................... 36
Reference list of commands ............................................ 68
Remaining volume ........................................................... 19
Special cases............................................................. 20
Remove command........................................................... 61
Remove labware.............................................................. 57
Reservoir rack ......................................................... 90, 174
Reservoirs ..................................................................... 174
Item number............................................................. 161
Reset a user password .................................................. 106
Reset password ............................................................. 106
Restoring data ............................................................... 110
Reverse stroke................................................................. 20
Parameter test .................................................................67
Routine
Methods ................................................................... 220
Parameters for Transfer command ..................................68
Run tab ............................................................................ 74
Password .......................................................................105
Run the method ......................................................... 74, 80
S
Password forgotten ........................................................106
Pattern .............................................................................64
Safety devices ................................................................. 26
PCR accessories
Item number .............................................................163
Safety instructions
Meaning of symbols ..................................................... 7
PCR setup
Methods ...................................................................220
Sample Transfer ............................................................ 192
Pipet.Tool .......................................................................192
Plates .............................................................................179
Labware files ............................................................179
226
Sample Transfer command.............................................. 69
Save application .............................................................. 50
Sequencing setup
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
User accounts................................................................ 102
Short instructions ...........................................................114
User groups ................................................................... 107
SMTP configuration .......................................................100
User intervention ........................................................... 214
Source and destination ....................................................62
User Intervention command ............................................ 73
Stacking labware........................................................55, 55
User password....................................................... 105, 106
Start Cycler command .....................................................73
StartCycler .....................................................................215
Starting the method .........................................................74
Stop method.....................................................................80
Support ..........................................................................183
T
Technical Data
Dimensions ..............................................................156
Weight ......................................................................156
Temp Cycler command ....................................................73
TempCycler....................................................................214
V
Volume............................................................................. 20
Aspiration volume ...................................................... 21
CORRECTION........................................................... 22
Extra aspiration .......................................................... 20
Filling volume ............................................................. 18
Remaining volume ..................................................... 19
Required volume........................................................ 21
Reverse stroke ........................................................... 20
terms .......................................................................... 18
Working volume ......................................................... 18
Volume check .................................................................. 21
W
Thermoadapter ..............................................................173
Autoclaving...............................................................154
Cleaning ...................................................................154
Wait ............................................................................... 213
Thermoadapter Frosty ...................................................179
Weight ........................................................................... 156
Thermoadapter LC Sample............................................173
when command finished................................................ 198
Thermoblock
Autoclaving...............................................................154
Cleaning ...................................................................154
Cooling effect ...........................................................174
Worktable base adapter
Cleaning................................................................... 154
Thermoblocks ........................................................171, 172
Thermoblocks with plates ..............................................183
Thermorack
Autoclaving...............................................................154
Cleaning ...................................................................154
Cooling effect ...........................................................174
Index
Methods ...................................................................222
Wait command................................................................. 72
Work tab .......................................................................... 48
Working volume ............................................................... 18
Worktable
Cleaning................................................................... 154
Position labware......................................................... 32
Worktable tab .................................................................. 53
Thermorack and 0.2 mL tubes.......................................172
Thermoracks..........................................................171, 172
Tip detection ..................................................................189
Tips ................................................................................168
Labware folder/.........................................................182
Tool interlock....................................................................96
Tools ..............................................................................184
Transfer command ....................................................62, 68
Transfer Command Pattern..............................................64
Tubes + (Thermo)racks + Modules
Labware folder/.........................................................182
Tubs
Labware folder/.........................................................183
Two Location Rack.........................................................170
U
Update Firmware .............................................................96
Update labware................................................................93
User account overview...........................................101, 101
227
Index
epMotion® 5070 PC CB with epBlue — Operating manual
228
Eppendorf offices
Eppendorf offices
AUSTRALIA & NEW ZEALAND
Eppendorf South Pacific Pty. Ltd.
Phone: +61 2 9889 5000
Fax: +61 2 9889 5111
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.com.au
CANADA
Eppendorf Canada Ltd.
Phone: +1 905 826 5525
Fax: +1 905 826 5424
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorfna.com
FRANCE
Eppendorf France S.A.R.L.
Phone: +33 1 30 15 67 40
Fax: +33 1 30 15 67 45
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.fr
ITALY
Eppendorf s.r.l.
Phone: +390 2 55 404 1
Fax: +390 2 58 013 438
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.it
SLOVAKIA
Eppendorf Czech & Slovakia s.r.o.
Phone: +421 911 181 474
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.sk
SWITZERLAND
Vaudaux-Eppendorf AG
Phone: +41 61 482 1414
Fax: +41 61 482 1419
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.ch
USA
Eppendorf North America, Inc.
Phone: +1 516 334 7500
Fax: +1 516 334 7506
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorfna.com
AUSTRIA
Eppendorf Austria GmbH
Phone: +43 (0) 1 890 13 64 - 0
Fax: +43 (0) 1 890 13 64 - 20
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.at
CHINA
Eppendorf China Ltd.
Phone: +86 21 38560500
Fax: +86 21 38560555
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.cn
GERMANY
Eppendorf Vertrieb
Deutschland GmbH
Phone: +49 2232 418-0
Fax: +49 2232 418-155
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.de
JAPAN
Eppendorf Co. Ltd.
Phone: +81 3 5825 2363
Fax: +81 3 5825 2365
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.jp
SOUTH & SOUTHEAST ASIA
Eppendorf Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
Phone: +60 3 8023 2769
Fax: +60 3 8023 3720
E-mail:
[email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.com.my
THAILAND
Eppendorf (Thailand) Co. Ltd.
Phone: +66 2 379 4212-5
Fax: +66 2 379 4216
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.com.my
OTHER COUNTRIES
Internet: www.eppendorf.com/
worldwide
BRAZIL
Eppendorf do Brasil Ltda.
Phone: +55 11 30 95 93 44
Fax: +55 11 30 95 93 40
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.com.br
CZECH REPUBLIC
Eppendorf Czech & Slovakia s.r.o.
Phone: +420 323 605 454
Fax: +420 323 605 454
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.cz
INDIA
Eppendorf India Limited
Phone: +91 44 42 11 13 14
Fax: +91 44 42 18 74 05
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.co.in
NORDIC
Eppendorf Nordic Aps
Phone: +45 70 22 2970
Fax: +45 45 76 7370
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.dk
SPAIN
Eppendorf Ibérica S.L.U.
Phone: +34 91 651 76 94
Fax: +34 91 651 81 44
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.es
UNITED KINGDOM
Eppendorf UK Limited
Phone: +44 1223 200 440
Fax: +44 1223 200 441
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.co.uk
In touch with life
Your local distributor: www.eppendorf.com/worldwide · Eppendorf AG Hamburg · Germany · E-mail: [email protected]
Application Support Europe: Tel: +49 1803 666 789 (Preis je nach Tarif im Ausland; 9 ct/min aus dem dt. Festnetz; Mobilfunkhöchstpreis 42 ct/min)
[email protected]
North America: Tel: +1 516 334 7500 · Toll free phone: +1 800 645 3050 · E-mail: [email protected]
Asia Pacific: Tel: +60 3 8023 6869 · E-mail: [email protected]
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement